CP300 Owner's Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graph-

ics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics

appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated

on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction sec-

tion.

The exclamation point within the equi-

lateral triangle is intended to alert the

user to the presence of important operat-

ing and maintenance (servicing) instruc-

tions in the literature accompanying the

product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead sym-

bol, within the equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert the user to the presence

of uninsulated “dangerous voltage”

within the product’s enclosure that may

be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a

risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is prop-

erly installed and used in its normal and customary manner,

all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify

this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically

authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety

standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the

expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been

modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be cor-

rect at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the

right to change or modify any of the specifications without

notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce

products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the pro-

duction methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In

keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we

want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is approx-

imately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the

replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from

children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regu-

lated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is

required by law to return the defective parts. However, you

do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these

parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and fed-

eral regulations that relate to the disposal of products that

contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manu-

facturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsi-

bility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates

the location of the name plate. The model number, serial

number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate.

You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this

manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

92-469- 1 (rear)

CP300 Owner’s Manual

The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles,

and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table specified

by the manufacturer, or sold with

the apparatus. When a cart is

used, use caution when moving

the cart/apparatus combination

to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or

plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects

have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

(UL60065_03)

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates

the location of the name plate. The model number, serial num-

ber, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You

should record the model number, serial number, and the date of

purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CP300 Owner’s Manual

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accor-

dance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals

in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of

the three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. (2 wires)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave.,

Buena Park, Calif. 90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Stage Piano

Model Name : CP300

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including inter-

ference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

CP300 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

Please keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators. Also, do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the

cord, or place heavy objects on it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The

required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust

which may have accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt

to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately

and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or

wet conditions, place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or

glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If

any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the

power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet.

Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service

personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then

have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a

multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or

possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet,

always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can

damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not

to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might

accidentally fall over.

• When transporting or moving the instrument, always use two or

more people. Attempting to lift the instrument by yourself may

damage your back, result in other injury, or cause damage to the

instrument itself.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables, to

prevent damage to the cables or injury to anyone who might trip

over them.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are

using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs,

immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from

the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is

still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not

using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power

cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Location

DMI-5 1/2

CP300 Owner’s Manual

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components,

turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on

or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum

levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the

instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps

on the panel. This could cause physical injury to you or others,

damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the

instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches

or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of

time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause

permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/ damage to the

product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow

the notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio,

stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices.

Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise.

When you use the instrument along with an application on

your iPad, iPhone or iPod touch, we recommend that you

set “Airplane Mode” to “ON” on that device in order to

avoid noise caused by communication.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or

vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct

sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to

prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to

the internal components or unstable operation.

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the

instrument, since this might discolor the panel or

keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not

use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-

impregnated wiping cloths.

• During extreme changes in temperature or humidity,

condensation may occur and water may collect on the

surface of the instrument. If water is left, the wooden parts

may absorb the water and be damaged. Make sure to

wipe any water off immediately with a soft cloth.

 Saving data

• Current memory data (see page 82) is lost when you turn

off the power to the instrument. Save the data to the

storage memory (see page 82)/external device such as a

computer.

Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect

operation. Save important data to external device such as

a computer.

Information

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data

including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is

strictly prohibited except for your personal use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer

programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights

or with respect to which it has license to use others'

copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without

limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files,

WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any

unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside

of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any

violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON'T

MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.

 About functions/data bundled with the

instrument

• This device is capable of using various types/formats of

music data by optimizing them to the proper format music

data for use with the device in advance. As a result, this

device may not play them back precisely as their

producers or composers originally intended.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual

are for instructional purposes only, and may appear

somewhat different from those on your instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Apple, Mac, Macintosh, iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual

are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective companies.

Connections

Handling caution

DMI-5 2/2

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Stage Piano CP300. The CP300 features exceptionally high-quality

sound, comprehensive features and a variety of editing functions—making it suitable for a wide range of

applications, including live performance and recording.

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and

convenient functions of the CP300. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place

for future reference.

About this Owner’s Manual

This manual consists of four main sections: Introduction, Basic Operation, Reference and Appendix.

Introduction (page 6)

Please read this section ﬁrst.

Basic Operation (page 20)

This section explains the basic functions and how to use them in detail.

Refer to this section while you play the CP300.

Reference (page 53)

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the CP300’s various functions. Refer to this section as

necessary.

Appendix (page 94)

This section contains important reference material, including Voice and Drum Kit lists, and various detailed

charts and tables.

• The illustrations and LCD displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may

appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly

prohibited except for your personal use. If you wish to use such data for occasions other than personal use, consult a

This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect

to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer

software, style ﬁles, MIDI ﬁles, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs

and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal

consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES. This device is capable of using various types/

formats of music data by optimizing them to the proper format music data for use with the device in advance. As a result,

this device may not play them back precisely as their producers or composers originally intended.

Trademarks

•Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation.

•Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective companies.

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Supplied Accessories

• Power cord

• Foot pedal (FC3)

• Owner’s Manual

Main Features

The CP300 gives you the ultimate acoustic grand piano sound—utilizing three-stage dynamic sampling,

providing the ability to change tone with the sustain pedal, and adding a subtle, authentic release sound when

you lift your ﬁngers from the keys.

Among the advanced features are:

• 88-key “Graded Hammer” keyboard with action that is virtually indistinguishable from an actual acoustic

piano.

•Sophisticated AWM synthesis engine and tone generation system, with a maximum polyphony of 128 notes.

Using AWM, the CP300 has 50 original Voices—including a variety of ultra-realistic piano and other

keyboard Voices, plus a wealth of authentic sounds of virtually every instrument type.

•High-grade ﬁve-band Master EQ, which enables you to control the tone intuitively using sliders on the

panel.

•Luscious reverb and chorus effects, plus an enormous variety of other effects that add extraordinary depth

and expression to your sound.

• Comprehensive MIDI functions for use with other devices and in larger music production systems.

•Four pedal connectors for maximum expressive capabilities—especially ideal for live performance—and

built-in high-quality stereo speakers.

•A powerful, versatile Performance function, which lets you store and instantly recall your custom CP300

settings, including Dual/Split conﬁgurations, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel

values and Master Edit settings.

•Built-in 16-track sequencer for recording and playing back your keyboard performance, as well as for

creating complex multi-instrument arrangements and Songs—up to a maximum 16 parts.

•Master mode, which allows you to independently control up to four external tone generators.

• Comprehensive selection of inputs/outputs and interfaces—including two separate stereo output pairs,

stereo inputs, MIDI terminals, and a USB connector.

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Application Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Before Using the CP300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Using the Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Using Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Turning the Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Setting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Playing the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Playing the Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Display Settings—Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CP300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Basic Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Control Names and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Quick Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Listening to the Demo Songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Playing Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Changing the Volume for Each Part (Zone Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Combining Voices—Dual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Using the Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Bending Notes—Pitch Bend Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Equalizer (EQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Key Transposition—Transpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Using the Click. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using the Master Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Selecting a Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Recording Your Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Recording Your Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Re-recording Parts of a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Other Recording Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Song Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Playing Back a Song . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Panel Lock Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

MIDI Transmission On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Contents

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

MIDI Panic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Built-in Speakers On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Reference Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Master Settings—Master Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Voice Edit—Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

About MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

MIDI Settings—Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Other Settings—Basic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Master Equalizer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Using the Performance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Performance Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Handling Performance Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Performance File—Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Handling Song Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Song File—Basic Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings . . . . . . . 85

Song Settings—Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Connecting to External Audio Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Connecting to External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Connecting to External MIDI Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Connecting to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Message List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

MIDI Data Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Factory Setting List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Voice List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Program Change List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Preset Performance List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

XG Voice List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

XG Drum Kit List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Effect Type List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Effect Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Effect Data Assign Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

MIDI Implementation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Listening

• Listening to Demo Songs with different Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“Listening to the Demo Songs” on page 23

• Listening to your recorded performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Playing Back a Song” on page 49

Playing

• Selecting and playing Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Playing Voices” on page 25

• Selecting and playing Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Selecting a Performance” on page 40

• Using different pedals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Using the Pedals” on page 33

• Using multiple MIDI tone generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Using the Master Mode” on page 39

Changing Voices

• Viewing the list of Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Voice List” on page 103

• Viewing the list of Performances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Preset Performance List” on page 106

• Combining Voices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Combining Voices—Dual” on page 29

• Playing different sounds with left and right hands

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split” on page 31

• Adding Variations to the Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Bending Notes—Pitch Bend Wheel” on page 34

“Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel” on page 34

“Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus” on page 35

“Equalizer (EQ)” on page 36

Recording

• Recording your performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Recording Your Performance” on page 42

• Deleting recorded Songs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Handling Song Files” on page 81

Settings

• Making detailed settings for Voices. . . . . . . . . . . . “Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit” on page 56

• Making detailed settings for the entire CP300 “Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings” on page 67

• Making settings for Master mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Master Settings—Master Edit” on page 53

• Making detailed settings for MIDI. . .“Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings” on page 63

• Making detailed settings for Master Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“Master Equalizer Settings” on page 72

Saving

• Saving the Voice settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .“Handling Performance Files” on page 76

Connecting the CP300 to other devices

• What is MIDI?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “About MIDI” on page 63

• Connecting to multiple MIDI devices . . . . . . . . . . “Connecting to External MIDI Equipment” on page 90

• Raising the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Connecting to External Audio Equipment” on page 88

• Connecting to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Connecting to a Computer” on page 92

Quick solutions

• Returning to the main display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Display Settings—Basic Operation” on page 15

• Resetting the default settings . . . . . “Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CP300” on page 16

• About the display messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Message List” on page 94

• Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Troubleshooting” on page 98

Application Index

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Before Using the CP300

1 Make sure that the instrument’s [POWER] switch on the rear panel is at the OFF

position.

2 Connect the supplied power cord to the [AC INLET] jack (page 22) on the

instrument’s rear panel.

3 Connect the other end of the power cord to an AC outlet. Make sure your CP300

meets the voltage requirement for the country or region in which it is being used.

Connect the included pedal (FC3) to the [1 SUSTAIN] jack.

An optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch or FC7 foot controller can alternately be connected to this jack. Also

an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch or FC7 foot controller can be connected to the [4 AUX] jack, and can

be assigned to control a variety of parameters on the instrument (page 33).

Power Supply Connections

Using the Pedals

POWER

OFF

POWER

OFF!!

AC INLET jack

Power cord (included)

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL

SUSTAIN

AUX

SOFT

SOSTENUTO

MIDI

OUT

THRU

USB

OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT

RL RL/MONO R L/MONO

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL

SUSTAIN

AUX

SOFT

SOSTENUTO

FC7

FC3/FC4/FC5

Before Using the CP300

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

If you are using a set of headphones, connect them to the [PHONES] jack.

Do not use headphones at a high volume for an extended period of time. Doing so may cause hearing loss.

n If the [SPEAKER] button is lit, this indicates that the built-in speakers sound normally when using the

headphones.

Make sure the volume setting of the CP300 and external devices are turned down to the minimum.

Press the [POWER] switch to turn the power on.

The display located in the center of the front panel lights up.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the CP300.

The display will disappear.

Using Headphones

Tur ning the Power On

PHONES jack

CAUTION

POWER

OFF

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

POWER

ON!

****** PleaseWait ******

****** YAMAHA ******

NO YES

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

Before Using the CP300

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

To adjust the volume, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial located at the left of the panel. When you start

playing, re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] dial to the most comfortable listening level.

n The [MASTER VOLUME] dial also controls the volume of the headphones.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Display

Setting the Volume

Terminology

Master Volume: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound.

EXIT

CONTRAST

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

The level

decreases.

The level

increases.

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Playing the keyboard

Tr y playing some of the realistic and dynamic CP300 sounds from the keyboard now.

When you turn the power on following the directions in “Power Supply Connections” (pages 11 and 12), the

display below appears.

In this condition, you can play the keyboard and hear the sound of the selected “Grand Piano 1” Voice.

To change the Voice, press any one of the Voice group buttons located at the right of the panel.

Play the keyboard and enjoy the sound.

Playing the Sounds

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

Voice group buttons

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

Basic Operation

In this section you’ll learn about the fundamental operations of the CP300—the use of the panel buttons and controls and

how to restore the CP300’s memory to the factory default settings.

Each function may have many items or parameters from which you can choose. To select an item or parameter,

press one of the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons.

Each parameter in the display corresponds to the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons next to it.

Sometimes, after you’ve changed the parameter values or settings, you may want to reset them to their normal

condition. To do this, simply press the [–] button and [+] button simultaneously.

n The TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons are the same shape as the A [–][+] – D [–][+] buttons. Parameters

corresponding to button pairs of this shape can all be reset to their default values by pressing both buttons

simultaneously.

To execute the operation, press B [+(YES)] button. To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.

In general, when a prompt is shown on the upper right of the display, press the appropriate B [– (NO)]

[+(YES)] buttons to execute or cancel the operation.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from a function.

Display Settings—Basic Operation

GrandPiano1 Choir

Strings E.Bass

NO YES

ClickVolume

100

NO YES

SaveToMemory Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

NO: Cancel

YES: Execute

NO YES

CONTRAST

EXIT

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

Basic Operation

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

The CP300 has a Factory Set function for restoring your CP300’s memory to the factory default settings.

This lets you restore the CP300’s default Voices and Performances, as well as its System and other settings.

Refer to “Factory Setting List” on page 101.

There are two ways you can restore the CP300’s memory to the factory default settings: 1) Set the “Factory Set”

parameter in the Other Settings menu, or 2) Turn the power off and turn the power on again while holding the

C7 key (rightmost key on the keyboard).

Method 1

1 Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to access the Other Settings menu.

2 Press the [OTHER SETTING] button repeatedly or use the A [–][+] buttons to call up

“Factory Set” in the display.

3 Use the D [–][+] buttons to select either “Memory File Excluded” or “Memory File

Included.”

Storage memory selections:

Memory File Excluded.......................Memory ﬁles are maintained.

Memory File Included .......................Memory ﬁles are erased.

n The “Character Code” parameter in the Song File menu does not change (page 84).

Restoring the Factory-programmed Settings of the CP300

OTHER SETTING

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemoryFileExcluded

NO YES

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemoryFileExcluded

NO YES

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemoryFileIncluded

NO YES

Indicates memory ﬁles are maintained.

Indicates memory ﬁles are erased.

Basic Operation

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

4 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

After the job has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original

display.

For Factory Set operations that take longer to process, you will see the message “Executing” during processing.

Do not switch the power off while this message is on the display. Turning the power off in this state may cause the

system to freeze.

Method 2

Simultaneously hold down the white key on the right end of the keyboard (C7), and press the [POWER]

switch to turn on the power to the CP300.

In this case, the Memory ﬁles saved in the storage memory are not erased.

If you wish to erase Memory ﬁles at this time, simultaneously hold down the rightmost white key (C7) and

black key (Bb6) together and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the CP300.

Terminology

File: A ﬁle contains various data in a group. A ﬁle includes both Performance data and Song data (pages 73, 81).

Terminology

Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save Performance ﬁles and recorded Songs.

CAUTION

POWER

OFF

POWER

OFF

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

OFF

POWER

ON!

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

Basic Instructions

Turning the Power On

First, turn the power on and set

up the keyboard before playing.

• Before Using the CP300 (pages 11

and 12)

Selecting and Playing a Voice

The CP300 features an exceptionally wide variety of Preset Voices

for playing in virtually any musical style. Try searching through

the Voices to ﬁnd your favorites.

• Selecting a Voice (page 25)

Terminology

Preset: Refers to data loaded to the internal memory of the CP300

before being shipped from the factory.

Combining Voices and Playing Them on the

Keyboard

The CP300 allows you to play several different Voices together in

a layer, or play one Voice with your left hand while you play a

different Voice (or even two layered Voices!) with your right. Try

out some of the variations and experiment with your own Voice

combinations.

• Playing Different Voices Simultaneously (page 27)

• Combining Voices—Dual (page 29)

• Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split

(page 31)

Create Your Own Original Voices

Once you’ve explored your favorite Voices and feel comfortable

with them, try branching out creatively and use the editing

features to make your own original Voices.

• Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit (page 56)

Connecting to a Computer and MIDI devices

• Connecting to External Audio Equipment (page 88)

• Connecting to External MIDI Equipment (page 90)

• Connecting to a Computer (page 92)

Basic Instructions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Introduction

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

3-16

TRACK

PERFORMANCE

PERFORM.FILE

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

MASTER

MASTER EDIT

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

Recording Your Performance and Playing It Back

Recording and playing back your performance is exceptionally easy. The

CP-300 allows you to record up to sixteen independent parts, letting you

record the left- and right-hand parts separately—and lets you build up a

complete, multi-instrument Song by recording each part one-by-one.

• Recording Your Performance (page 42)

• Other Recording Techniques (page 46)

• Handling Song Files (page 81)

• Playing Back Songs (page 49)

Terminology

On the CP300, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes

demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes.

Using the Performance Functions

The useful Performance functions enable you to store and recall the entire

CP300 settings all together. These include the Dual/Split settings, Voice

and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master

Edit settings. If you have any original Voices you’ve created, you can save

these to a Performance as well.

• Using the Performance Functions (page 73)

• Selecting a Performance (page 40)

• Performance Parameters (page 74)

• Handling Performance Files (page 76)

Using as a Master Keyboard

The Master mode of the instrument enables you to control up to four external tone

generators (or four separate instrument parts on one multi-timbral tone generator).

This effectively lets you play four different MIDI instruments at one time. Once you’ve

created your custom Master settings, you can save them to a Performance as well.

• Using the Master Mode (page 39)

• Master Settings—Master Edit (page 53)

Control Names and Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Control Names and Functions

1 Pitch Bend wheel (page 34)

Controls the pitch bend effect.

2 Modulation wheel (page 34)

Controls the modulation effect.

3 [PHONES] jack (page 12)

For connection to a pair of stereo headphones.

4 [POWER] switch (page 12)

For turning the power on or off. The power is turned on if the

button is set to this position: . The power is turned off if

the button is set this way: .

5 [MASTER VOLUME] dial (page 13)

Adjusts the overall volume.

6 [SONG VOLUME] slider (page 47)

Adjusts the volume of the Song playback.

7 [ZONE CONTROL] sliders (pages 28, 39)

These four sliders adjust the output level for each Layer parts

(up to four). Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the

function assigned to the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders.

8 [MASTER] button (page 39)

Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the CP300 to

function as a Master keyboard.

9 [MASTER EDIT] button (page 53)

Enables selection of the settings for the Master mode.

) [PERFORMANCE] button (page 40)

Switches the Performance on/off.

! [PERFORM.FILE] button (page 76)

Enables selection of Performance File settings, such as saving

and deleting Performance data, and making other settings for

Performance ﬁles.

Front Panel

POWER

OFF

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

SONG

VOLUME

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

5 6 7 8

) @ $ & ( º ™ £

! # % ^ * ¡

PHONES

A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D

Control Names and Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

@ [TRANSPOSE] button (page 37)

The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of

the entire keyboard up or down, letting you easily match the

pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other

instruments.

# SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons

(pages 42, 49)

Selects a Preset Song or one of your recorded Songs.

$ TRACK [1], [2], and [3-16] buttons (page 50)

For turning off the speciﬁed track as required so you can

practice the corresponding track (the track that is turned off)

on the keyboard.

% SONG [REC] button (page 42)

For recording your keyboard performance.

^ SONG [PLAY/PAUSE], [STOP] buttons

(page 49)

Plays back the Preset Songs or your recorded Songs.

& [SONG FILE] button (page 81)

Saves recorded Songs and makes other settings for Song ﬁles.

* [SONG SETTING] button (page 85)

Enables selection of the settings for playback of recorded

Songs.

( [MIDI OUT] button (page 51)

Switches MIDI transmission on/off.

º [PANEL LOCK] button (page 51)

Switches panel lock on/off. Turning on the button disables the

panel operations.

¡ TEMPO [UP]/[DOWN] buttons (page 38)

Adjusts the tempo.

NO YES

EXIT

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MIDI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

LOW LO-MID

MID

HI-MID

HIGH

MASTER EQUALIZER

™ ¢ § ¶ • ‚ ¤ › ﬂ

∞ ª ⁄ ‹ ﬁ

D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

Control Names and Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

™ A to D [–][+] buttons (page 15)

For selecting parameters and changing values while viewing

the display.

£ Display (page 15)

For showing various messages and certain settings of the

instrument.

¢ [CONTRAST] knob (page 13)

Adjusts the brightness of the display.

∞ [EXIT] button (page 15)

Returns to the initial display (the display that ﬁrst appears

when the power is turned on).

§ Voice group buttons (pages 25, 40)

These let you select from sixteen groups of Voices, including

grand piano. You can also select a Performance if the

[PERFORMANCE] button is turned on.

¶ [VOICE EDIT] button (page 56)

Enables selection of detailed settings of the sounds and effects.

• [SPLIT] button (page 31)

Allows you to play different Voices on the left- and right-hand

sections of the keyboard.

ª VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons (page 25)

Enables selection of alternate Voices in the selected Voice

group.

‚ [REVERB], [CHORUS] buttons (page 35)

These add ambience (Reverb) and depth (Chorus) to the

sound. You can turn the corresponding effect on or off with a

single touch.

⁄ MASTER EQ EDIT [▼][▲] buttons (page 72)

Enables selection of detailed settings for the Master Equalizer.

¤ [SPEAKER] button (page 52)

Switches the built-in speakers on or off.

‹ [CLICK] button (page 38)

Switches the click function on or off.

› [MIDI SETTING] button (page 64)

Enables selection of detailed MIDI settings.

ﬁ [OTHER SETTING] button (page 67)

This lets you make detailed settings, such as adjusting the

keyboard touch or making ﬁne adjustments to the scale.

ﬂ [MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders (page 36)

These ﬁve sliders adjust the tone of each band: LOW (low

band) to HIGH (high band).

1 [AC INLET] jack (page 11)

Connect the supplied AC power cord here. Use only the AC

power cord supplied with the CP300.

2 [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jacks

(pages 11, 33)

For connecting the included pedal (FC3), an optional FC4/5

foot switch, or FC7 foot controller.

3 MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] connectors (page 90)

For connecting external MIDI devices, allowing the use of

various MIDI functions.

4 [USB] connector (page 92)

For connecting the CP300 and computer.

5 OUTPUT [L][R] jacks (page 88)

These jacks output balanced audio signals, and are for

connection to an external device such as a mixer.

6 OUTPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks (page 88)

These jacks output stereo audio signals (1/4" mono phone

plug). For monophonic output, use just the L/MONO jack.

7 INPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks (page 89)

External audio signals can be input via these phone jacks (1/4"

mono phone plug). The sound of an external instrument can

be reproduced via the CP300’s speakers. Use 1/4" mono

phone plugs. For stereo input from an audio device, connect

to both the L/MONO and R jacks.

Rear Panel

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL

SUSTAIN

AUX

SOFT

SOSTENUTO

MIDI

OUT

THRU

USB

OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT

RL RL/MONO R L/MONO

1234567

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Quick Guide

The CP300 has a variety of specially recorded Demo Songs that effectively showcase each of the instrument’s

Voice groups. Listen to some of these Demo Songs now and hear the wide-ranging capabilities of the CP300.

n Make sure the CP300 is ready for playback. Details are given in the section “Before Using the CP300” on page 11.

1 Simultaneously press both the [MIDI SETTING] button and the [OTHER SETTING]

button.

The Voice group button indicators will ﬂash in sequence.

The “Voice Demo” message appears in the display.

2 Press one of the Voice group buttons to listen to the Demo Songs.

The corresponding Voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Demo Songs provided for each

Voice group will play back in sequence until you press the [STOP] button.

Adjusting the Volume

To adjust the volume level of the Demo Songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] dial or [SONG VOLUME]

slider.

n Make sure that the [SONG VOLUME] slider is set appropriately. If the [SONG VOLUME] slider is set to

minimum, no sound can be heard.

3 Press the button of the Voice group currently being played or the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button to stop the Voice demo.

4 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Demo selection display.

Listening to the Demo Songs

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

3 4 12

VoiceDemo

SelectVoiceButton

NO YES

MIN MAX

MASTER VOLUME

SONG

VOLUME

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Listening to the Piano Demo Songs

1 Simultaneously press both the [MIDI SETTING] button and the [OTHER SETTING]

button.

2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the Piano Demo Songs.

The “Piano Demo” message appears in the display.

3 Press one of the Voice group buttons to listen to the corresponding Piano Demo

Song.

The Piano Demo Songs are assigned to the sound buttons as follows.

Voice Name Piano Demo Song Description

1 GRAND PIANO 1 Stereo sampling Song recorded in stereo.

2 GRAND PIANO 2 Mono sampling Song recorded with a mono sampled sound.

3 MONO PIANO Dynamic sampling: mezzopiano Showcases the Dynamic Sampling feature, with

multiple velocity-switched samples to accurately

simulate the timbral response of an acoustic

instrument.

4 E. PIANO 1 Dynamic sampling: mezzoforte

5 E. PIANO 2 Dynamic sampling: forte

6 E. PIANO 3 With Sustain

(with Sustain Sampling)

Showcases the Sustain Sampling feature, which

reproduces the unique resonance of an acoustic

grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the

damper pedal is pressed.

7 CLAVI. No Sustain

(without Sustain Sampling)

8 VIBES With KeyOff

(with Key-off Sampling)

Showcases the Key-off Samples that add the

subtle sound produced when the keys are

released on an acoustic piano.

9 ORGAN 1 No KeyOff

(without Key-off Sampling)

10 ORGAN 2 With String Resonance Showcases the String Resonance feature that

recreates the characteristic resonance of actual

piano strings.

11 HARPSI. No String Resonance

PianoDemo

SelectVoiceButton

NO YES

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting a Voice

1 Select the desired Voice group button by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.

In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button.

n Make sure the [PERFORMANCE] button is turned off. For details about Performances, refer to page 73.

n Refer to the “Voice List” on page 103 for more information on the characteristics of each Preset Voice.

2 Select the desired Voice by using the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons or the A [–][+]

buttons.

The currently selected Voice will sound when you play the keyboard.

Playing Voices

Voice Group Voice Name Voice Group Voice Name

GrandPiano1 Grand Piano 1 Organ1 Jazz Organ

Mellow Piano 1 Theater Organ

Rock Piano Rock Organ

Honky Tonk Piano Draw Organ

GrandPiano2 Grand Piano 2 Organ2 Pipe Organ Principal

Mellow Piano 2 Pipe Organ Tutti

MonoPiano Mono Piano 1 Pipe Organ Flute

Mono Piano 2 Harpsichord Harpsichord 8'

Comp. Piano 1 Harpsichord 8'+4'

Comp. Piano 2 Strings Strings

E.Piano1 Chorus E.Piano Synth Strings

Phaser E.Piano Slow Strings

AutoPan E.Piano Choir/Pad Choir

Standard E.Piano Slow Choir

E.Piano2 DX E.Piano 1 Scat

DX E.Piano 2 Synth Pad 1

Synth Piano Synth Pad 2

E.Piano3 Tremolo Vintage E.P. Guitar Nylon Guitar

Vintage E.Piano Steel Guitar

Amp.Sim.Vintage E.P. Bass Wood Bass

Clavi. Phaser Clavi. Bass&Cymbal

Clavi. 1 Electric Bass

Wah Clavi. Fretless Bass

Clavi. 2 XG XG Voice

Vibraphone Vibraphone

Marimba

Celesta

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

Voice group buttons

Mellow Piano 1

NO YES

Indicates the currently selected Voice

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

About XG Voices

The XG Voices are categorized and contained in appropriate folders. Select the XG Voice group ﬁrst, then

select the desired Voice.

2-1 Press the [XG] button.

2-2 Simultaneously press the [–] [+] buttons located beside the XG Voice name display,

to call up the display for selecting XG Voices.

In this case, press the A [–][+] buttons simultaneously to call up the XG Voice selection display.

The XG Voice selection display can also be called up by pressing both the VARIATION [▼][▲]

buttons simultaneously, after pressing the [XG] button.

2-3 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select a Voice group.

2-4 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a speciﬁc Voice.

3 Play the keyboard.

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

PIANO XG

00:GrandPiano

NO YES

Voice group name

Voice name

Indicates that an XG Voice is selected

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The advanced features of the CP300 allow you to do things and perform in ways that are simply not possible

on an acoustic instrument. For example, you can play several different Voices together in a layer, or play one

Voice (or even two) layered Voices with your left hand while you play a different Voice (or two) layered Voices

with your right.

You can make detailed settings for each Voice and combined Voice in Dual or Split. Refer to the “Detailed

Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit” on page 56.

Keyboard Part Combinations

The CP300 lets you effectively divide the keyboard into four independent parts: Main, Layer, Left and Left

Layer. Moreover, a different Voice can be assigned to each part.

■ Playing a Single Voice (Main part) (page 25)

You can play a single Voice over the entire keyboard range. This is used for normal performance.

■ Playing Two Voices Simultaneously (Dual) (page 29)

This lets you play a unison melody with two different instruments, or combine two similar, complementary

Voices to create a thicker sound.

■ Playing Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split) (page 31)

This allows you to play different Voices with your left and right hands. For example, you can play a bass

part with your left hand, using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass Voice, and a melody on top with your right

hand.

■ Playing Three Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual for the

Main parts) (pages 29, 31)

■ Playing Three Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual for the

Left parts) (page 31)

■ Playing Four Different Voices with Your Left and Right Hands (Split and Dual) (page 30)

n The volume level for each Voice part can be adjusted independently. For details, refer to page 28.

Playing Different Voices Simultaneously

Main part

Layer part

Main part

Left part Main part

Left part

Layer part

Main part

Left Layer part

Left part

Main part

Left Layer part

Left part

Layer part

Main part

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The convenient [ZONE CONTROL] sliders allow you to adjust the volume of each part independently while

you play the keyboard. Moving a slider up increases the volume while pulling the slider down decreases it.

n When you play a single Voice (Main part), you can adjust the volume by moving the [ZONE 1] slider. In this case,

the [ZONE 2], [ZONE 3] and [ZONE 4] sliders have no effect on the volume.

Turning on the [MASTER] button switches the function assigned to the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders. Refer

to the “Using the Master Mode” on page 39.

Changing the Volume for Each Part (Zone Control)

SONG

VOLUME

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

Left Layer part

Left part

Layer part

Main part

ZONE 1: Main part

ZONE 2: Left part

ZONE 3: Layer part

ZONE 4: Left Layer part

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Using Voices of Different Voice Groups—Dual

n Make sure the [PERFORMANCE] button is turned off. For details about Performances, refer to page 73.

1 Press two Voice group buttons at the same time (or press one Voice group button

while holding down another) to enable Dual.

In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button and the [CHOIR/PAD] button.

The [GRAND PIANO 1] button and [CHOIR/PAD] button light. The selected Voice name will appear

in the display.

2 Select the particular Voice for each part by using the A [–][+] buttons and B [– (NO)]

[+ (YES)] buttons.

You can also select the Main part Voice by using the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.

n XG Voices can also be selected. For more information, refer to “About XG Voices” on page 26.

Select the “Honky Tonk Piano” Voice by using the A [–][+] buttons and select the “Scat” Voice by using

the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons.

To select three parts—Main, Layer and Left—simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and press

the desired Voice group button.

Combining Voices—Dual

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 3

Voice group buttons

GrandPiano1 Choir

NO YES

Main part Layer part

Dual

HonkyTonkPiano Scat

NO YES

Main part Layer part

GrandPiano1 Choir

Strings

NO YES

Main part Layer part

Left part

Split + Dual for the Main parts

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

To select four parts—Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer—simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button

and press two Voice group buttons.

You can select other Voices by using the A – D letter buttons (A [–][+] to D [–][+]).

n For details about the Split function, refer to page 31.

3 Press any single Voice group button to exit Dual and return to normal play.

Using Voices in the Same Voice Group—Dual

Dual can also be used to select and play Voices in the same Voice group.

1 Press one of the Voice group buttons.

2 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the desired Voice.

You can also select the Main part Voice by pressing the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.

3 Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to select another Voice in the same Voice group.

To use identical Voices, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons once.

To use different Voices within the same Voice group, press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons repeatedly.

GrandPiano1 Choir

Strings E.Bass

NO YES

Main part Layer part

Left part

Left Layer part

Split + Dual

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

1 Press the [SPLIT] button to enable Split.

The [SPLIT] button lights.

2 Select a Voice for the right-hand area by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.

In this step, press the [GRAND PIANO 1] button.

Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the “Honky Tonk Piano” Voice.

3 Select a Voice for the left-hand area by simultaneously holding down the [SPLIT]

button and pressing one of the Voice group buttons.

In this step, press the [CHOIR/PAD] button.

Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the “Scat” Voice.

To divide the keyboard into Main, Layer and Left parts, press two Voice group buttons at the same time

(or press one Voice group button while holding down another).

To divide the keyboard into Main, Layer and Left Layer parts, simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT]

button and press two Voice group buttons.

To divide the keyboard into four parts—Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer—perform both the above

operations (last two sentences) in order.

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

2, 3

1,4,5

[SPLIT] button

HonkyTonkPiano

Scat

NO YES

Main part

Left part

Split

GrandPiano1 Choir

Strings

NO YES

Main part Layer part

Left part

Split + Dual for the Main parts

Grand Piano 1

Strings E.Bass

NO YES

Main part

Left part

Left Layer part

Split + Dual for the Left parts

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

4 Specify the split point (the border between the right- and left-hand range).

The default setting (factory setting) is “F#2.” (If you do not need to change the split point, skip this

step.)

To Change the Split Point Setting

4-1 Simultaneously hold down the [SPLIT] button and use the D [–][+] buttons to specify

the split point.

There is also a quicker, more intuitive way: instead of using the D [–][+] buttons, simultaneously hold

down the [SPLIT] button and press the appropriate key on the keyboard.

n The Main part and Layer part of the split point are speciﬁed simultaneously. If you wish to independently change

the split point for each part, you can call up the Other Settings menu and use the “Split Point” parameter to set the

Main part split point and use “Split Point 2” to set that of the Layer part (page 69).

4-2 Release the [SPLIT] button to return to the main display.

5 Press the [SPLIT] button to exit Split and return to normal play.

Center “C” (C3)

SplitPoint

F#2

NO YES

Split point

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Make sure that the power is off when connecting or disconnecting any pedal.

n •By connecting a pedal to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack, you can use the pedal to control one of various

assignable functions. Refer to the “Pedal 1/Pedal 2/Pedal 3/Pedal 4” parameter in the Voice Edit menu (pages 61, 62).

•Depending upon the pedal that is connected to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] connector, the effect produced by

operating the pedal (on/off, dynamics, etc.) might be reversed. Refer to the “Pedal Type” parameter in the Other

Settings menu (page 70).

• The function of the [PLAY/PAUSE] button can be assigned to the pedal connected to the [2 SOSTENUTO]/[3

SOFT]/[4 AUX] jacks. Refer to the “Pedal Play/Pause” parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 70).

The [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack is set initially for use with the following functions (factory default

setting).

Sustain Pedal (1 SUSTAIN jack)

This jack is for connecting the included FC3 foot pedal. The pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on

an acoustic piano. Connect the included pedal (FC3) to this jack and press the pedal to sustain the sound.

When Voices of the GRAND PIANO 1 Voice group and the Mono Piano 1 and Comp. Piano 1 Voices are selected,

pressing the FC3 pedal activates the instrument’s special Sustain Samples, which accurately recreate the unique

resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. The FC3 can also be used to control the half pedal

effect on these Voices, recreating the partial damping of strings that is possible on an actual piano. An optional FC4/

FC5 foot switch can also be connected to this jack. However, these foot switches cannot be used to control the half

pedal effect.

n The depth of the effect produced by the Sustain Samples can be adjusted via the “Sustain Sampling Depth”

parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 69).

Sostenuto Pedal (2 SOSTENUTO jack)

This jack is for connecting an included foot pedal FC3 and an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch.

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will

sustain as long as the pedal is held. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while other notes are

played “staccato.”

n Organ, string and choir Voices will continue to sound for as long as the sostenuto pedal is depressed.

Soft Pedal (3 SOFT jack)

This jack is for connecting an included foot pedal FC3 and an optional FC3/FC4/FC5 foot switch. The soft pedal

reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. The soft pedal will not

affect notes that are already playing.

n The depth of the Soft pedal can be adjusted via the “Soft Pedal Depth” parameter in the Other Settings menu

(page 69).

AUX Pedal (4 AUX jack)

This jack is for connecting an optional FC7 foot controller.

This AUX Pedal can be assigned to control a variety of parameters on the instrument. Refer to the “Pedal 4"

parameter in the Voice Edit menu (page 62).

Using the Pedals

AC INLET

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL

SUSTAIN

AUX

SOFT

SOSTENUTO

MIDI

OUT

THRU

USB

OUTPUT OUTPUT INPUT

RL RL/MONO R L/MONO

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL

SUSTAIN

AUX

SOFT

SOSTENUTO

FC7

FC3/FC4/FC5

CAUTION

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down (roll the wheel toward you)

while playing the keyboard. This wheel is self-centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when

released. Try out the Pitch Bend wheel while pressing a note on the keyboard.

n The bend range can be adjusted via the “Pitch Bend Range” parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 70).

The Modulation wheel applies vibrato to the sound. The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect

that is applied to the sound. Try out the Modulation wheel with various Preset Voices while playing the

keyboard.

n Keep in mind that many of the Preset Voices are not set with a Modulation effect. (This is to ensure the most

natural sound on these acoustic instrument Voices.) However, the Modulation wheel can be effectively used to

control user-programmable effects, as well as alter the sounds of a connected MIDI tone generator.

n Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation Wheel. Refer to the “Modulation” parameter in the Voice

Edit menu (page 62).

n To avoid accidentally applying Modulation or other effects to the current Voice, make sure the Modulation Wheel

is set to minimum before you start playing.

Bending Notes—Pitch Bend Wheel

Adding a Vibrato Effect to the Sound—Modulation Wheel

Raises the pitch

Lowers the pitch

Pitch Bend wheel

Maximum

Minimum

Modulation wheel

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The effect processing of the CP300 features both System Effects and Insertion Effects.

System Effects—Reverb and Chorus

System Effects are applied to the overall sound, whether it be a Voice, an entire Performance, a Song, etc. Each

part can be given a different amount of System Effect processing.

Reverb

The reverb effects add a warm ambience to the sound, simulating the complex reﬂections of actual

performance spaces, such as a concert hall or small club.

Refer to “Effect Type List” on page 114 for more information on the preset reverb types.

Pressing the [REVERB] button alternates between On and Off.

The indicator lights if reverb is turned on.

n You can select a reverb type via the “Reverb Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu, and adjust the reverb depth

for the selected Voice via the “Reverb Send” parameter (page 58).

n Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied for these Voices: GRAND

PIANO 1, GRAND PIANO 2 Voice groups and Mono Piano 1, Mono Piano 2, Marimba and Celesta Voices.

Chorus

The chorus effects use various types of modulation processing, including ﬂanger and phaser, to enhance the

sound in a variety of ways.

Refer to “Effect Type List” on page 114 for more information on the preset chorus types.

Pressing the [CHORUS] button alternates between On and Off.

The indicator lights if chorus is turned on.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] button on the panel and by setting the

“Chorus On Off” parameter in the Voice Edit menu (page 59). The [CHORUS] button setting on the panel is

temporary. That is, if you select another Voice, the chorus setting for the previous Voice is cancelled.

The “Chorus On Off” parameter setting is saved for each Voice. That is, if you select a given Voice, the chorus

setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

n You can select a chorus type via the “Chorus Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu and adjust the chorus depth

for the selected Voice via the “Chorus Send” parameter (page 59). You can also turn chorus on or off via the

“Chorus On Off” parameter (page 59).

Insertion Effects

Insertion effects can be applied individually to each part. Insertion effects are mainly used to directly process a

single part. The CP300 has three separate Insertion Effect blocks, letting you apply different effects on up to

three parts from Main, Layer, Left and Left Layer parts (page 27).

n You can select an Insertion type via the “Ins. Type” parameter in the Voice Edit menu, and adjust the Insertion

effect depth for the selected part via the “Dry/Wet Balance” parameter (pages 59, 60).

The CP300 also has a Variation effect that can be used as either a System effect or Insertion effect. Refer to

“Effect Type List” on page 114 for more information on the types of effects you can use. The Variation effect

can be controlled only by the use of MIDI messages.

Enhancing the Sound with Reverb and Chorus

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

[REVERB] button

[CHORUS] button

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Usually an equalizer is used to correct the sound output from amps or speakers to match the special character

of the room, or to change the tonal character of the sound. EQ divides the sound into several frequency bands,

and adjustments are made by raising or lowering the level of each band.

By adjusting the sound according to the genre—classical music being more reﬁned, pop music more crisp, and

rock music more dynamic—you can draw out the special characteristics of the music and make your

performance more enjoyable.

Two separate EQ sections are available on the instrument: Part EQ and Master EQ.

Part EQ

The Part EQ is applied to each Voice.

n You can adjust the part’s low and high frequency via the “EQ Low Freq.” and “EQ High Freq.” parameter in the

Voice Edit menu. You can also adjust the part’s low- and high-range gain via the “EQ Low Gain” and “EQ High

Gain” parameters (pages 60, 61).

Master EQ

Master EQ is applied to the ﬁnal, overall (post-effect) sound of the instrument.

When the corresponding slider is set to center, the equalizer level is set to normal.

n You can adjust the Q (frequency bandwidth) and Frequency parameters via the Master EQ Edit menu (page 72).

However, the last gain setting by the slider or Master EQ Edit menu will remain in effect.

n While the “Equalizer Lock” parameter (page 71) in the Other Settings menu is turned on, the Master Equalizer

values will not be affected by Performance recall, incoming MIDI data and Song playback.

Equalizer (EQ)

Gain

Low Gain

High Gain

Freq.

Low Freq. High Freq.

LOW HIGHHIGHMIDMIDLOWMID

–

5 bands

Gain

Q (frequency bandwidth)

Freq.

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

The CP300’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in

semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to

“+5,” playing a C key produces a pitch of F. In this way, you can play a Song as though it were in C major, and

the CP300 will transpose it to the key of F.

Press the [TRANSPOSE] button to transpose the entire keyboard. With just the press of a button, you can

reconﬁgure the transpose setting. For details about setting the amount of transposition, see below. The

indicator will light when a transpose setting other than “0” is selected.

1 Press the [TRANSPOSE] button.

The amount of transposition in semitone units appears in the display.

2 Press the D [–][+] button to transpose down or up as required.

You can set the range from -12 semitones (down one octave) to 12 semitones (up one octave) in semitone

steps.

Transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard.

The transposition range:

-12: -12 semitones (down one octave), 0: normal pitch, 12: 12 semitones (up one octave)

n You can set the keyboard’s Transpose via the “Transpose” parameter in the Other Settings menu, when the

[TRANSPOSE] button is turned on (page 69).

n The Transpose setting affects transmitted MIDI data.

3 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Transpose setting.

n The edited Transpose settings will be erased after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory

Backup’s Transpose setting to On in the Other Settings menu, the current Transpose setting will remain in effect

when you turn the power off and back on again (page 71).

Key Transposition—Transpose

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

[TRANSPOSE] button

Transpose

Keyboard 0

NO YES

Amount of transposition

Quick Guide

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Pressing the [CLICK] button turns Click or the metronome sound on and off.

1 Press the [CLICK] button to start the click.

Adjusting the Tempo

1-1 Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

The “Tempo” parameter will appear in the display.

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10-500), use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the

D [–][+] buttons.

To reset the tempo to the default setting, press the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] or the D [–][+] buttons

simultaneously.

Default setting: 120 (If a Song has been selected, the Song tempo is used.)

1-2 Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the Main display.

2 Press the [CLICK] button to stop the click sound.

n You can change the time signature, volume, and bell on/off settings using the Song Setting menu (page 87).

n The click will not start after the Song is stopped. If you wish to start the click, press the [CLICK] button again.

n The click will stop when Song playback is paused.

Using the Click

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 2

TEMPO [DOWN][UP] button

Tempo

120

NO YES

Tempo

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Using the Master Mode

The Master mode allows you to divide the keyboard into a total of four independent areas (called “Zones”). Each Zone can be

assigned to different MIDI channels and have different Control Slider functions. This makes it possible to control up to four

tone generators simultaneously from a single keyboard, and to control Voices of an external tone generator over several

different channels, in addition to the internal Voices of the CP300 itself.

Press the [MASTER] button to turn the Master mode on.

Turning on the Master mode also enables the “Master Edit” settings for this function.

For details, refer to page 53.

Example: Connecting to external tone generators

n While the Master mode is turned on, the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter in the Master Edit menu will be

enabled for MIDI channel assignments.

n If you turn the power off and on again while the Master mode is on, the function will be turned off.

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

MIDI CH2 MIDI CH1

MIDI CH4 MIDI CH3

External tone generator

Voice

ZONE 4

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 1

External MIDI synthesizer/tone generator

ZONE 1: Main part

ZONE 2: Left part

ZONE 3: Layer part

ZONE 4: Left Layer part

Internal tone generator

Left Layer part

(ZONE 4)

Left part

(ZONE 2)

Layer part

(ZONE 3)

Main part

(ZONE 1)

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Selecting a Performance

All settings of the entire CP300 can be saved together in a group, referred to as a “Performance.” A Performance includes

Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master Edit settings. For details

on Performance settings, refer to page 73.

A total of 64 Preset Performances are supplied with the CP300. The Preset Performances consist of 32 Yamaha original Voices

and 32 default Performances (Grand Piano Voices). Try some of the Preset Performances and listen to the sound.

n Refer to the “Preset Performance List” on page 106 for more information on the characteristics of each Preset Performance.

1 Press the [PERFORMANCE] button to enter the Performance mode.

The [PERFORMANCE] button ﬂashes.

2 Choose a Performance by pressing one of the Voice group buttons.

Playing the keyboard sounds the Performance indicated in the display. The parameters shown in the

Performance Play display are brieﬂy explained below.

3 Press the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons to select one of the Performance variations,

A to D.

A single Performance can include up to four different Performances (A to D). “A” and “B” features the

Yamaha original Voices. “C” and “D” contains the default Performances (Grand Piano Voices).

4 Play the keyboard.

5 Press the [PERFORMANCE] button to exit the Performance Play mode.

The [PERFORMANCE] button lamp turns off. The Voice selection will return to the Voice selected

before entering the Performance.

You can exit the Performance yet keep the current Voice used in the Performance by simultaneously

holding down the B [– (NO)] button and pressing the [PERFORMANCE] button.

Terminology

Preset Performance ﬁle: A single ﬁle that includes data of 64 different Preset Performances.

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

21, 5 2

A01.Piano+Pad

GrandPiano1 WarmPad

NO YES

A01.Piano+Pad

Voice names (Main and Layer only)

Hold this down to view

all Voices of the parts

Hold this down to view

the Performance ﬁle name

Number

(Select the number by pressing

one of the Voice group buttons.)

Performance name

A to D

(Select “A” to “D” by pressing the

VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.)

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording Your Performance

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the CP300’s versatile recording features. For example, you can

record just the left-hand part, and then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since the

CP300 lets you record up to sixteen tracks separately, you can build up a complete, multi-instrument Song by recording each

part one-by-one.

About the Recording Features of the CP300

Unlike conventional audio recording (such as to an MD recorder or cassette tape recorder), the CP300 records

your keyboard playing as performance data. In other words, while an MD records the actual sounds, the

CP300 records the physical “moves” and settings that create the sound—including which notes are played, the

timing they were played with, the Voice(s) used, and the tempo value. This type of recording has the advantage

of allowing you greater editing ﬂexibility and smaller data size.

n If you want to record the sounds of your performance as audio data, you can do so by connecting an MD recorder

or other recording device to the [OUTPUT] connector (page 88).

Song

On the CP300, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and preset tunes.

Song (performance data)

Demo Songs Preset Songs

Recorded

Songs

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

n The Performance mode is automatically turned off if the CP300 is set to recording or recording standby while

Performance mode is on.

1 Press the SONG SELECT [N] button and [O] button at the same time.

n “P-000: New Song” is a blank Song provided for you to record your performance.

2 Select a Voice (page 25).

In addition to selecting the desired Voice, make sure to set other sound-related parameters, such as reverb

and chorus. When you’ve ﬁnished making the settings, press the SONG SELECT [N] or [O] button

to return to the “New Song” display.

Using the Click Sound

You can record data while using the Click sound. Press the [CLICK] button in Step 2.

The Click sound is not recorded.

n Refer to page 48 for more information on recording in Dual/Split mode.

3 Select a recording track.

Recording to Track 1:

Press the TRACK [1] button while holding down the [REC] button.

Recording to Track 2:

Press the TRACK [2] button while holding down the [REC] button.

Recording to Tracks 3 – 16:

Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button while holding down the [REC] button, then select the desired

recording track, 3 – 16. Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the TRACK [3-16] button.

Recording Your Performance

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

3 2

1 3 4,65

PresetSong Bar 001

P-000:NewSong

NO YES

Indicates the current measure.

(The words “bar” and “measure” are used interchangeably.)

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

When the recording track has been selected, the indicator for the [REC] button and selected track lights

up in red. (Record Ready mode can be disengaged before recording by pressing the [REC] button again.)

Set the Tempo, if necessary (page 38).

If this Record Standby display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons

once. If you select “Key On” as the Starting method (page 44), a Tempo setting of 120 will be entered at

the beginning of the Song.

4 Start recording.

You can start recording by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button, or have recording started automatically

for you as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. The current measure number is shown in the display

during recording.

n Song recording can be paused by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Recording will begin automatically as soon

as you play a note on the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button again.

5 Press either [STOP] button or [REC] button to stop recording.

Press the [STOP] button to return to the top of the Song.

6 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to play back the recording.

n To erase recorded data from a track, use the “Channel Clear” parameter in the Song Setting menu for Song

playback/recording (page 86).

7 Save the recorded Song

When pressing the SONG SELECT [N][O] button, A [–][+] button or C [–][+] button, a “Song

Changed Save?” message appears in the display. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the ﬁle. If you want

to cancel the Save operation, press the B [– (NO)] button. For details about saving Song ﬁles, refer to

page 82.

SongRecording Bar 001

P-000:NewSong

NO YES

SongChanged Save?

NO YES

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

This section explains how to record a speciﬁc section or part of a Song again.

1 Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback display is displayed to move

through the measures, or play back the recording and press the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-

record.

If the playback display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons once.

2 Select a Voice or Voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 42 if you wish to change the previous settings.

3 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press one of the C [–][+] buttons

repeatedly to specify how the recording should start. Similarly, use the D [–][+]

buttons to specify how the recording should end.

While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select display appears.

Starting methods:

Norm: All existing data in the Song will be erased after re-recording starts.

Key On: Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased (when re-

recording part of the Song).

Ending methods:

Replace: Existing data following the point at which you stopped recording will be erased.

Punch Out: Existing data following the point at which you stopped recording will remain.

4 Select a recording track, then start recording.

After this, follow the procedure beginning with Step 3 on page 42.

Re-recording Parts of a Song

PresetSong Bar 012

P-000:NewSong

NO YES

Indicates the current measure.

(The words “bar” and “measure” are used interchangeably.)

RecMode ExtraTrackCh=3

Start:Norm End:Replace

NO YES

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Data Recorded to User Songs

Data recorded to individual tracks:

• Notes played

• Voice selection

• Pitch Bend

• Pedal/Modulation wheel ON/OFF

• Reverb depth (Reverb Send)

• Chorus depth (Chorus Send)

• Insertion effect depth (Dry/Wet Balance)

• Sound brightness (Brightness)

• Resonance effect setting (Harmonic Content)

• Equalizer’s low-range frequency setting (EQ Low Freq.)

• Equalizer’s low-range gain setting (EQ Low Gain)

• Equalizer’s high-range frequency setting (EQ High Freq.)

• Equalizer’s high-range gain setting (EQ High Gain)

• Voice octave setting (Octave)

• Voice volume level (Volume)

• Stereo image of each Voice (Pan)

• Fine tuning of the pitch of two Voices in Dual mode (Detune)

• Volume level changes for each Voice with response to the way you play (Touch Sense)

• Voice Transpose (Transpose)

• Scale (Scale)

• Depth of Soft pedal effect (Soft Pedal Depth)

• Depth of string resonance (String Resonance Depth)

• Depth of sustain sampling (Sustain Sampling Depth)

• Volume of the key-off sound (Key-off Sampling Depth)

• Modulation (Modulation)

• Pitch Bend range (Pitch Bend Range)

Data recorded globally to all tracks:

• Tempo

• Time signature (beat)

• Reverb type

• Chorus type

• Insertion effect type

n You can change any of the settings with the exception of note data (including the Octave and Transpose setting)

after recording.

n You can change the time signature at the beginning of the Song, or at a speciﬁc position in the Song, by using the

B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the Song is stopped.

n When you record in the Dual or Split mode, the CP300 records each Voice onto a separate track. For details, refer

to page 48.

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Adding Data to or Recording Over an Existing Song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank Song

(P-000: New Song). You can also add new performance recordings to existing Songs, or overwrite your

previously recorded performances.

1 Press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] button then use the A [–][+] button to call

up “Memory Song.”

2 Press the C [–][+] button to select the Song you wish to add data to or record over.

You cannot add data to or record over Preset Songs.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording Your Performance” on page 42. To add

data to an existing Song, follow the procedure starting with Step 1 in “Re-recording Parts of a Song” on

page 44.

If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost.

Changing a Voice or Tempo After Recording

You can change the Voice or tempo after recording to change a Song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You

can also change these elements in the middle of a Song.

n Before changing the Voice or tempo, set the starting method to “Norm” (page 44). When the starting method is set

to “Key On,” you cannot change the Voice or tempo.

1 Select a Song you wish to change.

To select a Song, follow the procedure described in “Adding Data to or Recording Over an Existing

Song” above.

2 To change the Voice or tempo in the middle of the Song, specify the measure at which

the change is to be made by using the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons while the playback

display is appeared, or by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly

prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record.

If the playback display does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons once.

Other Recording Techniques

MemorySong Bar 001

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

CAUTION

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

3 Change the settings (Voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E. Piano 1 Voice to E. Piano 2, use the Voice group

buttons and the A [–][+] buttons to select E. Piano 2.

When you’ve ﬁnished making the settings, press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] button to

return to the Song Select display.

The panel settings made in Step 3 will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous

settings. Proceed with caution.

4 Simultaneously hold down the [REC] button and select a track to change the value.

The indicator for the selected part lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

Do not play the keyboard or press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. Doing so will start recording, erasing the recorded

data.

5 Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit the record mode.

When you exit the record mode, the display prompts you whether you want to overwrite the Song or

not. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to overwrite the Song.

n Refer to “Data Recorded to User Songs” on page 45 for information on the settings that can be changed here.

Adjusting the Volume Balance between the Song and the Keyboard

While recording multiple parts one-by-one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the

recorded parts and your current performance by using the [SONG VOLUME] slider.

Turning off the [MASTER] button lets you adjust the volume for the keyboard performance by using the

[ZONE CONTROL] sliders.

CAUTION

SONG

VOLUME

ZONE CONTROL

ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

Move the sliders to make

adjustments in the sound.

Recording Your Performance

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Recording in Dual or Split Mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the CP300 records each Voice onto a separate track. The following

table shows how tracks are assigned to each Voice.

When you record multiple parts into tracks one-by-one, or when you record new data over an existing Song (page 46),

the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and Extra Track “n” have been selected for recording.

Track n = Track 3 to 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceeds 16, Tracks 1, 2, and 3 are used.

n Changing between Dual and Split mode in the middle of a Song cannot be recorded.

Panel Assigned

recording track

Tra ck 1 Tra ck 2 Extra

Tra ck 3

Extra

Tra ck 4

Extra

Tra ck 5

Extra

Tra ck 6

... Extra

Tra ck 16

Dual

Main part Layer part

Main part

(Track n)

Layer part

(Track n+2)

Split

Main part Left part

Main part

(Track n)

Left part

(Track n+1)

Dual+Split

Main part Left part Main Layer

part

Left Layer

part

Main part Left part Main Layer

part

Left Layer

part

Main part

(Track n)

Left part

(Track n+1)

Main Layer

part

(Track n+2)

Left Layer

part

(Track n+3)

CAUTION

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

3-16

TRACK

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Song Playback

Songs you’ve recorded using the Record function (page 41) as well as Preset Songs can be played back on the CP300. You can

also play the keyboard along with Song playback.

1 Press one of the SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons to call up the Song Select display.

2 Select “Preset Song” or “Memory Song” by using the A [–][+] buttons.

The indication “Memory Song” can be called up when your Song data exists in internal storage memory.

3 Select the desired Song by using the C [–][+] buttons or SONG SELECT [N][O]

buttons.

Use the D [–][+] buttons to scroll through the Song name, if the name does not ﬁt in the display.

4 Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button to start playback.

n •Use the “Song Repeat” parameter in the Song Setting menu (page 87) to select repeat playback of all Songs or

repeat playback of a single Song.

•You can use the TEMPO [DOWN][UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during

playback (page 38).

• When the “Character Code” setting is different than that used when you named the Song, the title might be

displayed incorrectly. Change the CP300’s character type (“Character Code”) to that appropriate for the selected

Song (page 84).

5 Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Song automatically stops and the CP300 returns to the top of the Song.

If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a Song, press the [STOP] button. Song playback can be

paused by pressing the [PLAY/PAUSE] button.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the Main display.

Playing Back a Song

Terminology

Preset: Preset Song Memory. Several Preset Songs (16 Songs) are built into this instrument.

Memory: Refers to the memory storage location for saving recorded data on this instrument.

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 3 4, 553 6

PresetSong Bar 001

P-000:NewSong

NO YES

Song Playback

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Fast Forward and Rewind

The following operations can be performed in the Song select display:

•Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the Song

while the Song is played or stopped.

•Press the C [–] button during playback to locate the top of the current Song.

•Press the C [–] button twice (double-click) during playback to start playback from the previous Song.

•Press the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next Song.

• Press the [STOP] button or simultaneously press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons during playback or while

playback is stopped in the middle of the Song to locate the top of the Song.

Resetting the Tempo

Whenever you select a new Preset Song, the tempo is automatically reset to the Song’s original value.

n Performance mode is automatically turned off if you start Song playback while Performance mode is on.

Automatically Starting Song Playback by Playing the Keyboard—

Synchro Start

You can pause playback to begin when you play the keyboard (Synchro Start). Hold down the [STOP] button

and press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button. The [PLAY/PAUSE] indicator will blink, and the CP300 will wait for

Synchro Start.

In this condition, playback begins as soon as you play the keyboard.

n If you press the [STOP] button while waiting, Synchro Start will be cancelled.

Pedal Play/Pause

You can alternately start or pause Song playback by pressing a pedal connected to the CP300’s [ASSIGNABLE

FOOT PEDAL] jack. A pedal connected to the [ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jack can be assigned to play

and pause Preset Song playback from the “Pedal Play/Pause” parameter in the Other Settings function

described on page 70.

This is convenient when performing along with previously recorded parts—it lets you stop and start playback

of the recorded backing, while you add parts of your own live.

Turning Part Playback On and Off

While the CP300 is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on

those parts will not be played. Pressing the part buttons toggles part playback on and off. Turning a playback

part off lets you play that part yourself while the other parts play back.

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

Synchro Start standby mode

1. Hold down the [STOP] button

2. Press the [PLAY/PAUSE] button

3-16

TRACK

Tra ck 1

Tra ck 2

Track 3-16

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

Convenient Functions

This section covers various functions that you’ll ﬁnd come in handy as you play and perform with the instrument.

The panel lock function can temporarily disable the panel operation and prevent unintended operation during

live performance.

1 Double-click the [PANEL LOCK] button (press it quickly twice).

The [PANEL LOCK] button lights. A “PANEL LOCK” message also appears in the display. While the

Panel Lock function is engaged, panel operations will be ignored.

2 To cancel Panel Lock, double-click the [PANEL LOCK] button.

The [PANEL LOCK] button turns off, and the display returns to the previous display.

n The Panel Lock function affects all controls, with the exception of the [MASTER VOLUME] dial, the [SONG

VOLUME] slider, the [ZONE CONTROL] sliders, the [MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders, the Modulation wheel,

the Pitch bend wheel, and the pedals.

This parameter speciﬁes whether the CP300 transmits MIDI data to an external MIDI device (On) or not

(Off).

Pressing the [MIDI OUT] button alternates between On and Off. MIDI messages can be transmitted if the

button lamp is lit. MIDI messages cannot be transmitted if the lamp is off.

n This button is equipped with certain MIDI safeguards and also turns off pedal messages during performance. Even

if you turn MIDI transmission off while holding a key, a key-off message will still be transmitted when you release

the key. Turning MIDI transmission off also sends the following MIDI messages: Sustain Off, Sostenuto Off, Soft

Pedal Off.

n Keep in mind that if you turn MIDI transmission off, MIDI signals will not be transmitted no matter what other

MIDI transmission settings (in Master Edit and MIDI Settings) are made.

Panel Lock Function

MIDI Transmission On/Off

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

****** PANEL LOCK ******

Grand Piano 1

NO YES

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

Lit: Enables sending of MIDI messages. Off: Disables sending of MIDI messages.

Convenient Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation

This function serves as a convenient MIDI “panic” switch during performance when using a connected

external tone generator. If the connected tone generator continues to sound (stuck notes, etc.) even after you’ve

released the keys of the CP-300, using this MIDI Panic control transmits the necessary messages to stop the

tone generator from sounding continuously.

Press the [REVERB] button while holding the [MIDI OUT] button.

A “MIDI PANIC SEND” message appears in the display.

n Keep in mind that MIDI Panic transmission will not function if MIDI transmission is set to Off (page 51).

MIDI Panic messages: All Note Off, All Sound Off, Reset All Controllers, Sustain Off, Sostenuto Off, Modulation

Depth Off, Pitch Bend Center, Channel Pressure Off

This parameter speciﬁes whether the CP300’s built-in speakers produce sound (On) or not (Off).

Pressing the [SPEAKER] button alternates between On and Off. The built-in speakers produce sound if the

lamp is lit, and do not sound if the lamp is off.

n If the [SPEAKER] button is lit, the built-in speakers sound normally even when using the headphones.

MIDI Panic Control

Built-in Speakers On/Off

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

REVERB

CHORUS

*** MIDI PANIC SEND ***

NO YES

SPEAKER MIDI SETTING

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

SPEAKER MIDI SETTING

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

Lit: Speaker sounds normally. Off: Speakers do not sound.

Master Settings—Master Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Reference Section

Master Settings—Master Edit

The Master mode allows you to divide the keyboard into up to four independent areas (zones) which will be effective when

the [MASTER] button is turned on.

n This setting is retained even after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Master Setting to Off in the

Other Settings menu, the Master Settings will return to the default (initial) values when you turn on the power next time (page 71).

1 Press the [MASTER EDIT] button to call up the Master Setting display.

2 Select the desired item by pressing the [MASTER EDIT] button or by using the A [–]

[+] buttons.

For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 54.

3 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.

4 Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Master Setting display and return to normal play.

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

341, 2 5

Slider

Zone1 Volume

NO YES

Master Settings—Master Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters

For assigning speciﬁc functions to each [ZONE

CONTROL] slider.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Functions/range: Volume, Modulation, Brightness, Harmonic

Content, After Touch, Control numbers 001 – 031, 033 – 095, Off

Default setting: Volume

n If you select After Touch or control numbers 001 – 031,

033 – 095, the slider affects only connected MIDI

instruments and not the CP300 itself.

You can select speciﬁc Voices or programs on a connected

MIDI device by specifying a Bank Select MSB value, in

combination with the Bank Select LSB and Program

Change parameters below.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Setting range: 0 – 127

Default setting: 0

The three speciﬁed MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the

following conditions:

• When turning on the Master mode.

• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.

• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the

Master mode on.

You can select speciﬁc Voices or programs on a connected

MIDI device by specifying a Bank Select LSB value, in

combination with the Bank Select MSB parameter (above)

and the Program Change parameter (below).

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Setting range: 0 – 127

Default setting: 0

The three speciﬁed MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the

following conditions:

• When turning on the Master mode.

• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.

• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the

Master mode on.

You can select speciﬁc Voices or programs on a connected

MIDI device by specifying a Program Change number, in

combination with the Bank Select MSB and Bank Select

LSB parameters above.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Setting range: 1 – 128

Default setting: 1

The three speciﬁed MIDI messages—Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB and Program Change—will be transmitted in the

following conditions:

• When turning on the Master mode.

• When changing any of the values of Bank Select MSB, Bank

Select LSB or Program Change when the Master mode is on.

• When selecting a Performance which was saved with the

Master mode on.

Slider Settings

Bank Select MSB Settings for MIDI

Transmission to an External Tone Generator

Slider

Zone 1 Volume

NO YES

SendBankMsb

Zone 1 0

NO YES

Bank Select LSB Settings for MIDI

Transmission to an External Tone Generator

Program Change Number Settings for MIDI

Transmission to an External Tone Generator

SendBankLsb

Zone 1 0

NO YES

SendPG#

Zone 1 1

NO YES

Master Settings—Master Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

The pitch of a note can be shifted upward or downward in

steps of an octave in each zone. You can adjust the offset up

or down over a maximum range of two octaves.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Setting range: -2 – 0 – +2

-2 (two octaves lower), 0 (no pitch shift), +2 (two octaves higher)

Default setting: 0

The Octave setting is effective when the [MASTER] button is on.

It also affects the following settings:

Internal: [VOICE EDIT] Octave setting for each Voice

MIDI Output: [MASTER EDIT] Octave setting for each zone

When the [MASTER] button is off, Octave affects the following:

Internal and MIDI Output: [VOICE EDIT] Octave setting for each

Voice

Turns the sound from the internal tone generator on or off

for each part.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Settings: On/Off

Default setting: On

Speciﬁes the channels over which the CP300 transmits

MIDI data from each zone.

Setting targets: Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3, Zone 4

Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, Off

Default settings:

n When the [MASTER] button is turned off, the “MIDI

Out Channel” setting in the MIDI Settings menu is used

for MIDI channel assignments.

Octave Setting for Connected External Tone

Generator

Internal Tone Generator On/Off Status

Octave

Zone 1 0

NO YES

InternalTG

Zone 1 On

NO YES

MIDI Transmission Channel for Master Mode

Zone 1 Ch 1

Zone 2 Ch 2

Zone 3 Ch 3

Zone 4 Ch 4

MidiOutChannel

Zone 1 Ch1

NO YES

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

You can make detailed settings for Voice. You can make these settings for each Voice (or each combination of Voices)

individually.

1 Select the desired Voice or combination of Voices.

For instructions on how to select a Voice, see page 25.

2 Press the [VOICE EDIT] button to access the Voice Edit menu.

3 Use the A [–][+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the Voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected Voice.

n For details about the split point settings between the Main part and Left part, refer to the “To Change the Split

Point Setting” (page 32) or the “Split Point” parameter in the Other Settings menu (page 69). The split point

settings for the Layer part and Left Layer part can be changed via the “Split Point 2” parameter in the Other

Settings menu (page 69).

For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 58.

Voice Edit—Basic Operation

Voice Part Display Setup

MAIN Voices (displayed with a single

Voice or in Split mode)

The Main part Voice can be set.

Displayed when the MAIN side is in

Dual mode

The Main part Voice and Layer

part Voice can be set.

Displayed in Split mode

The Left part Voice can be set.

Displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual

mode

The Left part Voice and Left

Layer Voice can be set.

Main

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

Main x Layer

MainXLayer Set?-->

Octave(GrndPno1) 0

Left

Left Set?-->

Octave 0

Left x Left Layer

LeftXLeftLayer Set?-->

Octave(GrndPno1) 0

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

4 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.

You can change the Voice for each part when Main x Layer or Left x Left Layer is selected in Step 3 (in

Dual mode). The target Voice name will be displayed in parentheses.

5 Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.

6 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

n This setting will be retained even if you turn off the power to the CP300. The previous settings will be restored

when you turn on the power next time and the same Voice or part you selected before turning the power off will

automatically be selected.

7 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Voice Edit settings.

MainXLayer Set?-->

Octave(GrndPno1) 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

NO YES

Main Executing

Octave 0

NO YES

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters

This allows you to shift the pitch of a note upward or

downward in octave steps, over a range of +/- two octaves.

Setting range: -2 – 0 – +2

-2 (two octaves lower), 0 (no pitch shift), +2 (two octaves higher)

This allows you to set the volume level for each Voice part.

Setting range: 0 – 127

This allows you to set the position of the sound in the

stereo ﬁeld, left or right.

Setting range: L64 (hard left) – C (center) – R63 (hard right)

This allows you to ﬁnely tune the pitches of the two Voices

selected in Dual mode away from each other. Used

especially with similar sounding Voices, this creates a

warmer, richer sound.

Setting range: -20 – +20 (Positive (+) settings will raise the

pitch of the Main or Left Voice part’s sound and lower the pitch of

the Layer or Left Layer Voice part’s sound. Negative (-) settings

will do the opposite.)

This determines the types of Reverb effects used for the

Voices of the Main and Main x Layer parts. The Reverb

Type settings here are also used for the Voices of the Left

and Left x Left Layer parts, respectively. (These cannot be

set independently from the Main and Main x Layer Voices.)

Settings:

This allows you to control the depth of the reverb effect for

the Voice.

n The reverb effect is not applied if “Reverb Send” is set to

“0.”

n Reverb Send can be set independently for all Voice

parts—Main, Main x Layer, Left, and Left x Left Layer.

Setting range: 0 – 127

When the Voice part is set to Main x Layer or Left x Left Layer, parameters indicated with an asterisk (*) below are set for

each part’s Voice individually.

Octave*

Volume*

Pan (Stereo position)*

Main Set?-->

Octave 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Volume 115

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Pan C

NO YES

Detune (Dual mode only)

Reverb Type

Room Simulates the reverberation of a room.

Hall1 Simulates the reverberation of a concert hall.

Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of Hall 1.

Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound.

Plate Simulates the characteristic sound of a plate reverb.

Reverb Send*

MainxLayer Set?-->

Detune +3

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbType Hall1

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ReverbSend 10

NO YES

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This determines the types of Chorus effects used for the

Voices of the Main and Main x Layer parts. The Chorus

Type settings here are also used for the Voices of the Left

and Left x Left Layer parts, respectively. (These cannot be

set independently from the Main and Main x Layer Voices.)

Settings:

This allows you to control the depth of the chorus effect for

the Voice.

n Chorus Send can be set independently for all Voice

parts—Main, Main x Layer, Left, and Left x Left Layer.

Setting range: 0 – 127

This allows you to set the [CHORUS] button on or off for

each Voice. When you select a Voice, the [CHORUS]

button on/off setting for the Voice automatically changes

according to this parameter’s setting.

n Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is

disabled if “Chorus Send” is set to 0.

Setting range: On/Off

This allows you to select from a variety of effects (other

than reverb and chorus).

Settings:

This applies only to the Vibraphone Voice and allows you

to change the speed of the vibrato effect (controlled by the

Modulation wheel), simulating the electric rotor on an

actual vibraphone.

This is displayed only if “Vibe Rotor” is selected for the

“Ins. Type” parameter.

It enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select

the Vibraphone Voice and use the Modulation wheel.

Setting range: 1 – 10

Chorus Type

Chorus Makes the sound more rich and spacious.

Celeste Adds warm animation and spaciousness to the

sound.

Flanger Adds a sweeping, metallic sound, similar to a jet

airplane.

Chorus Send*

Chorus On/Off

Main Set?-->

ChorusType Chorus

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusSend 48

NO YES

Main Set?-->

ChorusOnOff Off

NO YES

Insertion Effect Type*

DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions.

DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions.

Echo Echo-like delay

CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.

Rotary Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker.

Tremolo Changes the volume level in rapid cycles.

VibeRotor Produces the vibrato effect of a vibraphone.

AutoPan Automatically pans the sound left to right and

back and forth.

Phaser Changes the phase of the sound periodically,

creating sweeping effects.

AutoWah Changes the center frequency of the wah ﬁlter

periodically.

SoundBoard Simulates the reverberation of a piano

soundboard.

AmpSimulator Recreates the distortion effect of a guitar amp.

Compressor This squeezes the dynamic range of a sound,

giving the overall sound greater “punch” and

impact.

Off No effect

Vibe Rotor Speed*

Main Set?-->

Ins.Type SoundBoard

NO YES

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorSpeed 6

NO YES

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This applies only to the Vibraphone Voice and allows you

to turn the vibrato effect (controlled by the Modulation

wheel) on and off. This is displayed only if “Vibe Rotor” is

selected for the “Ins. Type” parameter. When the

Vibraphone Voice is selected, the Vibe Rotor effect is

automatically set to On.

Setting range: On/Off

This allows you to set the rotation speed of the rotary

speaker effect. This is displayed only if “Rotary” is selected

for the “Ins. Type” parameter.

Setting range: Slow/Fast

This allows you to set the depth of the Insertion effect.

Some “Ins. Type” settings do not allow you to set the “Dry/

Wet Balance.”

Setting range: D63>W – D=W – D<W63

D63>W (outputs only the original sound with almost no effect

applied)

D=W (dry/wet balance is even)

D<W63 (outputs only the sound processed by the effect)

This allows you to set the brightness of the sound.

Setting range: -64 – +63

This allows you to adjust the resonance of the sound.

Setting range: -64 – +63

This allows you to adjust the low-range frequency of the

part EQ.

n For details about EQ or Equalizer, refer to page 36.

Setting range: 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz

This allows you to adjust the low-range gain (amount of

boost/cut of the low frequencies) of the part EQ.

Setting range: -12 dB – +12 dB

Vibe Rotor On/Off*

Rotary Speed*

Dry/Wet Balance*

Main Set?-->

VibeRotorOnOff On

NO YES

Main Set?-->

RotarySpeed Slow

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Dry/WetBalance D58>W

NO YES

Brightness*

Harmonic Content*

EQ Low Frequency*

EQ Low Gain*

Main Set?-->

Brightness 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

HarmonicContent 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowFreq. 80

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ LowGain 0

NO YES

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to adjust the high-range frequency of the

part EQ.

Setting range: 500 Hz – 16 kHz

This allows you to adjust the high-range gain (amount of

boost/cut of the high frequencies) of the part EQ.

Setting range: -12 dB – +12 dB

This allows you to determine the manner and degree to

which the volume level changes in response to your touch

on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume

level of actual harpsichords and pipe organs does not

change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal

setting for these Voices is 127. (See the setting range below.)

Setting range: 0 – 64 – 127

0: Softest level

64: Normal touch response; optimum dynamic range

127: Loudest level; ﬁxed (no change in response to touch)

This allows you to assign a speciﬁc function to the pedal

connected to the [1 SUSTAIN] jack.

Settings:

*For best results, use an optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller.

This allows you to assign a speciﬁc function to the pedal

connected to the [2 SOSTENUTO] jack.

Setting range: same as “Pedal 1” (above)

This allows you to assign a speciﬁc function to the pedal

connected to the [3 SOFT] jack.

Setting range: same as “Pedal 1” (above)

EQ High Frequency*

EQ High Gain*

Touch Sensitivity (Touch Sense)*

Main Set?-->

EQ HighFreq. 4.0k

NO YES

Main Set?-->

EQ HighGain 0

NO YES

Main Set?-->

TouchSense 64

NO YES

Assigning the Pedal 1 Function

Sustain On/Off switch-type damper (page 33).

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer

the further down you press the pedal (page 33)

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal (page 33)

Soft Soft pedal (page 33)

Expression* Makes the sound softer or louder

Off No function is assigned

Assigning the Pedal 2 Function

Assigning the Pedal 3 Function

Main Set?-->

Pedal 1 SustainCont

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Pedal 2 Sostenuto

NO YES

Main Set?-->

Pedal 3 Soft

NO YES

Detailed Settings for the Voices—Voice Edit

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to assign a speciﬁc function to the pedal

connected to the [4 AUX] jack.

Settings:

This allows you to specify the parameter controlled by the

modulation wheel.

Settings:

Assigning the Pedal 4 Function

Sustain On/Off switch-type damper (page 33)

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer

the further down you press the pedal (page 33).

Sostenuto Sostenuto (page 33)

Soft Soft (page 33)

Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.

ReverbSend Adds reverb accents to notes being played.

ChorusSend Adds chorus accents to notes being played.

Brightness Adds brightness accents to notes being played.

Harmonic

Content

Adds resonance accents to notes being played.

AfterTouch Adds after-touch accents to notes being played

(MIDI transmit only)

Ctrl #0 – #119 Adds accents by controllers #0 – 119 to notes

being played (MIDI transmit only).

Off No function is assigned.

Main Set?-->

Pedal 4 Expression

NO YES

Assigning the Modulation Wheel Function

Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.

MainVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played

in the Main part. (Displayed only when Main is in

Dual mode.)

LayerVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played

in the Layer part. (Displayed only when Main is in

Dual mode.)

LeftVolume Changes the volume level of notes being played

in the Left part. (Displayed only when Left is in

Dual mode.)

LeftLayer

Volume

Changes the volume level of notes being played

in the Left Layer part. (Displayed only when Left

is in Dual mode.)

RotarySpeed Changes the rotary speaker effect’s rotation

speed.

VibeRotor Changes the vibraphone’s vibrato speed.

Modulation Adds modulation accents.

ReverbSend Adds reverb accents to notes being played.

ChorusSend Adds chorus accents to notes being played.

Brightness Adds brightness accents to notes being played.

Harmonic Adds resonance accents to notes being played.

AfterTouch Adds after-touch accents to notes being played

(MIDI transmit only).

Ctrl #0 – #119 Adds accents by controllers #0 – 119 to notes

being played (MIDI transmit only).

Off No function is assigned.

Main Set?-->

Modulation Ctrl#001

NO YES

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings

Here you can make settings for MIDI applications, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels and other settings necessary when

using the CP300 with other MIDI devices.

n These settings will be retained even if you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s MIDI Setting to Off in

the Other Settings menu, the MIDI Settings will return to the default (initial) values when you turn on the power next time

(page 71).

n While the Master mode is turned on, the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter and “MIDI Out Select” parameter in the MIDI Settings

menu are not effective.

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables

the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI,

you can control a connected MIDI device from the CP300, or control the CP300 from a connected MIDI

device or computer.

MIDI Channels

MIDI data is transferred over 16 channels numbered from 1 through 16. Using these channels, 1 – 16, the

performance data for sixteen different instrument parts can be simultaneously sent over one MIDI cable.

Think of the MIDI channels as TV channels. Each TV station transmits its broadcasts over a speciﬁc channel.

Your home TV set receives many different programs simultaneously from several TV stations and you select the

appropriate channel to watch the desired program.

MIDI operates on the same basic principle. The transmitting instrument sends MIDI data on a speciﬁc MIDI

channel (MIDI Transmit Channel) via a single MIDI cable to the receiving instrument. If the receiving

instrument’s MIDI channel (MIDI Receive Channel) matches the Transmit Channel, the receiving instrument

will sound according to the data sent by the transmitting instrument.

For detailed information on how to set the MIDI transmit channel and the MIDI receive channel, refer to

page 65.

About MIDI

Weather Report

News

MIDI Transmit channel 2 MIDI Receive channel 2

MIDI

cable

Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

1 Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to call up the MIDI Settings menu.

2 Select the desired item by pressing the [MIDI SETTING] button or by using the A [–]

[+] buttons.

For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 65.

3 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.

4 Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.

5 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job, if a “Start?” message appears.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to call up the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”). Press the B [+ (YES)] button

once again to actually execute the job. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the

operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the MIDI Settings menu.

MIDI Settings—Basic Operation

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 22 5

346

MidiOutChannel

Main Ch1

NO YES

InitialSetup Start?-->

NO YES

Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters

This allows you to specify the channel over which the

CP300 transmits MIDI data.

Setting targets: Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, Off (not transmitted)

Default settings:

n While the Master mode is turned on, “MIDI Out

Channel” parameter in the Master Edit menu will be

enabled for MIDI channel assignments.

This allows you to specify the channel over which the

CP300 receives data from the MIDI [IN] or USB

connectors.

Setting targets: Song, Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer, Keyboard,

Off

Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 32

Default settings:

“Local Control On” is a state in which the CP300 produces

the sound from its tone generator when you play the

keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the keyboard and

the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means

that even if you play the keyboard, the CP300 will not

produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be

transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which

can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off” setting is

useful when you wish to play an external sound source

while playing the keys on the CP300, but don’t want the

CP300 to sound. It’s also useful for recording data to a

sequencer/computer and using the sequencer to route the

data to the appropriate tone generator or instrument.

Setting range: On/Off

Default setting: On

This allows you to select whether your performance data or

Song playback data is sent via MIDI.

Settings:

Default setting: Keyboard

n While the Master mode is turned on, keyboard

performance data is transmitted no matter what setting is

made here.

MIDI Transmit Channel Selection

Main Ch 1

Left Ch 2

Layer Ch 3

Left Layer Ch 4

MIDI Receive Channel Selection

Ch 1 – Ch 16 Song

Ch 17 Keyboard

Ch 18 Main

Ch 19 Left

Ch 20 Layer

Ch 21 Left Layer

Ch 22 – Ch 32 Off

MidiOutChannel

Main Ch1

NO YES

Selects the Voice part

Speciﬁes the channel

MidiInChannel

Ch1 Song

NO YES

Selects the MIDI receive partSelects the channel

Local Control On/Off

MIDI Out Select

Keyboard Performance data played on the keyboard

Song Song playback data

MIDI IN

(Ch 1 – Ch 16)

USB

(Ch 1 – Ch 32)

Ch 1 – Ch 16

Song

Ch 17 – Ch 32

Song

Keyboard

Internal Voices

LocalControl

NO YES

MidiOutSelect

Keyboard

NO YES

Detailed Settings for MIDI Operations—MIDI Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to specify which types of MIDI data the

CP300 will receive and respond to.

Type of data: Note, Control, Program, AfterTouch, PitchBend,

SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range: On/Off

Default setting: On for all types of data

This allows you to specify which types of MIDI data the

CP300 will transmit.

Type of data: Note, Control, Program, AfterTouch, PitchBend,

SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range: On/Off

Default setting: On for all types of data

This allows you to transmit initial panel setup data, such as

Voice selection and other settings, to a connected

sequencer. This is useful when you record performance data

to a sequencer, since it lets you take a “snapshot” of the

CP300 settings you want to use at the beginning of a

recorded Song and have those settings automatically called

up for you when you play back the Song.

You can transmit each setting data as the MIDI setting bulk

data.

Type of data:

Default setting: Current

Bulk data cannot be transmitted in the following situations:

• Song record/playback

• Song recording standby

• When selecting recording tracks

• Demo Song playback

Bulk data cannot be received in the following situations:

• Song record/playback

• Song recording standby

• When selecting recording tracks

• Demo Song playback

• When transmitting bulk data

• When the message “Receiving bulk data has failed” appears

If the Performance ﬁle has 56 ﬁles, or the Song ﬁle has 112

Songs (1.4 MB), the data transfer will take at least 3 minutes if

you are using the USB connection, or 21 minutes if you are using

the MIDI connection.

n If you’ve changed the “Character Code” setting (page 84)

since naming a Song and the Song name does not display

correctly, bulk data cannot be transmitted.

n Press the B [– (NO)] button or [EXIT] button to cancel

the transmission.

Never attempt to turn off the power while bulk data is being

transmitted. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of

all user data.

MIDI Receive Parameter

MIDI Transmit Parameter

Transmitting the Default Settings on the Panel

ReceiveParameter

Note On

NO YES

Selects the type of data Turns reception on or off

TransmitParameter

Note On

NO YES

Selects the type of data Turns transmission

on or off

InitialSetup Start?-->

NO YES

Bulk Dump

Current The data is set on the panel

Performance The data saved to the Performance

Voice The Voice data saved using Voice Edit

MemorySong/

Perf.File

The Performance ﬁle, the data saved to the

Song ﬁle.

ALL Send each bulk in sequence.

BulkDump Start?-->

Voice

NO YES

CAUTION

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings

The Other Setting(s) menu provides a variety of settings, generally related to the overall sound and operation of the CP300.

These include detailed settings for touch response, tuning, pedal operation, and more.

n The edited Other Settings will be erased after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Other Setting

to On in the Other Settings menu, the current Other Settings’ values will remain in effect when you turn the power off and back on

again (page 71).

1 Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to call up the Other Settings menu.

2 Select the desired item by pressing the [OTHER SETTING] button or by using the

A [–][+] buttons.

For information about the parameters and their values, refer to “Parameters” on page 68.

3 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a target item.

4 Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.

5 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job (if an “Execute?” message appears).

Pressing the B [+ (YES)] button calls up a conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”). Press the B [+ (YES)] button

again to execute the job. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is

complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

6 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Other Settings menu.

Other Settings—Basic Operation

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 2

346

Transpose

Song 0

NO YES

FactorySet Sure?-->

MemoryFileExcluded

NO YES

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters

This allows you to specify the touch response of the

CP300’s keyboard, or change how the sound responds to

the way you play the keys.

Settings:

Default setting: Medium

This allows you to ﬁnely tune the pitch of the entire

instrument—a useful feature when playing the CP300

along with other instruments or CD music.

Setting range: A3 = 427.0 Hz – 453.0 Hz (0.1 Hz steps)

Default setting: A3 = 440.0 Hz

This allows you to specify a tuning curve, Stretch or Flat,

for the Piano Voices groups (Grand Piano 1, Grand Piano 2

and Mono Piano). Actual piano tuners often employ stretch

tuning, extending the upper octaves of the piano slightly to

compensate for the perception of the human ear in the

higher range. The Flat setting is an acoustically perfect

tuning, to be used if the stretch-tuned piano Voice sounds

out of tune with other instrument Voices.

Settings:

Default setting: Stretch

This allows you to select different scales or tuning systems

for the instrument. Equal Temperament is the most

common contemporary piano tuning scale. However,

history has known numerous other scales, many of which

serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can

experience these tunings with the CP300.

Settings:

Setting range: C, C#, D, Eb, E, F, F#, G, Ab, A, Bb, B

For scales other than Equal, a root note must be speciﬁed using

the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)] buttons.

Default setting: Equal

Touch Response

Light A soft playing touch results in a relatively loud sound.

The volume level tends to be consistent.

Medium Standard touch response.

Heavy The keys must be played very strongly to generate

loud volume. This setting is best for a wide dynamic

range and optimum expressive control of the sound,

from pianissimo to fortissimo.

Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same

regardless of how strongly you play the keys. Use the

B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons to set the ﬁxed volume

level. Setting range of the ﬁxed volume level:

1 – 127

Tune

Piano Tuning Curve

TouchResponse Vel= 64

Fixed

NO YES

Tune

A3=440.0Hz

NO YES

PianoTuningCurve

Stretch

NO YES

Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos, with higher

octaves slightly “stretched.”

Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency relationships are

precisely duplicated in all octaves.

Scale

Equal The pitch range of each octave is divided equally

into twelve parts, with each half-step evenly

spaced in pitch. This is the most commonly used

tuning in music today.

PureMajor These tunings preserve the pure mathematical

intervals of each scale, especially for triad chords

(root, third, ﬁfth). You can hear this best in actual

vocal harmonies—such as choirs and a cappella

singing.

PureMinor

Pythagorean This scale was devised by the famous Greek

philosopher and is created from a series of

perfect ﬁfths, which are collapsed into a single

octave. The 3rd in this tuning are slightly

unstable, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and

suitable for some leads.

MeanTone This scale was created as an improvement on the

Pythagorean scale, by making the major third

interval more “in tune.” It was especially popular

from the 16th century to the 18th century. Handel,

among others, used this scale.

Werckmeister The Werckmeister and Kirnberger scales were

improvements on the mean-tone and

Pythagorean scales. The main feature of these

scales is that each key has its own unique

character. The scales were used extensively

during the time of Bach and Beethoven, and

even now are often used when performing period

music on the harpsichord.

Kirnberger

Scale BaseNote=C

PureMajor

NO YES

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to specify the split point (the boundary on

the keyboard separating the Main part and Left part).

Setting range: A-1 – C7

Default setting: F#2

This allows you to specify the secondary split point (the

boundary on the keyboard separating the Layer part and

Left Layer part).

Setting range: A-1 – C7

Default setting: F#2

The CP300’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift

the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone

intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and

to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the

range of a singer or other instruments.

Setting targets:

Setting range: -12 – 0 – +12

-12 (-1 octave) – 0 (normal pitch) – +12 (+1 octave)

Default setting: Keyboard = 0, Song = 0

n The Keyboard settings can only be made when the

[TRANSPOSE] button is turned on (page 37).

n You can also change the keyboard Transpose setting by

using the [TRANSPOSE] button. Whichever method

you use, the most recently made settings will be effective.

n The Transpose setting affects transmitted MIDI data.

This allows you to specify the depth of the soft pedal effect.

Setting range: 1 – 10

Default setting: 5

This parameter sets the amount or depth of the String

Resonance sound and is effective on certain Voice, such as

Grand Piano 1.

Setting range: Off, 1 – 10

Default setting: 5

This parameter sets the amount or depth of the Sustain

Sampling sound and is effective on the Mono Piano 1 and

Comp. Piano 1 Voices, as well as on the Grand Piano 1

Voice group.

Setting range: Off, 1 – 10

Default setting: 5

Split Point

Split Point 2

Transpose

Keyboard The sound you play with the keys

Song The sound of Song playback

SplitPoint(Main)

F#2

NO YES

SplitPoint(Layer)

F#2

NO YES

Transpose

Keyboard 0

NO YES

Soft Pedal Depth

String Resonance Depth

Sustain Sampling Depth

SoftPedalDepth

NO YES

StringResonanceDepth

NO YES

SustainSamplingDepth

NO YES

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to adjust the volume of the key-off sound

(the subtle sound that occurs when you release a key). This

parameter is effective on the Grand Piano 1, Mono Piano 1

and Comp. Piano 1 Voices, as well as on the E. Piano 1,

Clavi. and Harpsi Voice groups.

Setting range: Off, 1 – 10

Default setting: 5

This parameter affects only the Vibraphone Voice, and

enables you to select whether the Vibraphone sound is

sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“Piano

Like”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and

hold down the sustain pedal, like when playing an actual

vibraphone (“Normal”).

Setting range: PianoLike, Normal

Default setting: PianoLike

This allows you to assign the Song Play/Pause function to

the pedal, letting you start or pause Song playback with

your foot. In this setting, the selected pedal (2 – 4)

functions in the same manner as the [PLAY/PAUSE]

button on the panel.

n If you assign the Play/Pause function to a pedal and turn

the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal

in the Voice Edit menu (pages 61 and 62) is disabled.

Setting for: Pedal 2, Pedal 3, Pedal 4

Setting range: On/Off

Default setting: Off for all pedals

This allows you to select the type or polarity of the pedals

you use, connected to the [SUSTAIN] pedal jack,

[SOSTENUTO] pedal jack, [SOFT] pedal jack and [AUX]

pedal jack. If you are using a Yamaha-recommended pedal

(such as the FC4 or FC5), the Pedal Type need not be

changed. However, if you are using a pedal of a different

manufacturer, the polarity may be opposite and the effect

produced by operating the pedal (on/off, dynamics, etc.)

might be reversed. If this happens, you can use this setting

to correct the pedal operation.

Setting for: Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal 3, Pedal 4

Setting range: Make, Break

Default settings: Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal 3: Make; Pedal 4:

Break

This allows you to set the point at which the damper pedal

starts to affect the sound. In other words, you can change

the point at which the assigned effect begins to be applied,

as you press the pedal down. If the effect is a simple on/off

type effect, this setting speciﬁes the point at which the

effect will be switched on/off (with the exception of the

Expression function).

Refer to the section on assigning the pedal function in the

Voice Edit settings (page 61).

Setting range: -2 (effective with the shallowest press) – 0 – +2

(effective with the deepest press)

Default setting: 0

This allows you to specify the amount of pitch change

produced by moving the Pitch bend wheel. This parameter

applies only to the manually played sound (not to a

connected MIDI device). The value can be set in semitone

steps.

Setting range: 0 – 12 semitones (moving the wheel will raise/

lower the pitch by a maximum of 12 semitones or 1 octave)

Default setting: 2

Key-off Sampling Depth

Vibraphone Pedal Mode

Pedal Play/Pause

KeyoffSamplingDepth

NO YES

VibraphonePedalMode

PianoLike

NO YES

PedalPlay/Pause

Pedal 2 Off

NO YES

Selects the pedal to which

the function will be assigned

Selects on or off

Pedal Type

Half Pedal Point

Pitch Bend Range

PedalType

Pedal 1 Make

NO YES

HalfPedalPoint

NO YES

PitchBendRange

NO YES

Miscellaneous CP300 Settings—Other Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

This allows you to lock the Master Equalizer settings and

prevent them from being changed when selecting a

Performance, or by Song playback and incoming MIDI

data.

However, if bulk data (of the Current type) is received, the

Master Equalizer settings will be changed, no matter

whether the "Equalizer Lock" is turned on or off. (See Bulk

Dump in the MIDI Settings on page 66.)

Setting range: On/Off

Default setting: On

This allows you to select speciﬁc items and parameters, such

as Voice selection and reverb type, to be automatically saved

upon shutdown, ensuring that they will not be lost when

you turn off the power to the CP300.

If the backup function is turned on for an item, the settings

for that item when power is turned off will be in effect the

next time power is turned on. If the backup function is

turned off for an item, the settings in memory are erased

when you turn off the power. In this case, when you turn

on the power to the unit, the default settings (the initial

settings) will be used. Refer to the “Factory Setting List” on

page 101.

Keep in mind that the backup settings themselves, the ﬁles

of the storage memory, and Character Code setting

(page 84) are always saved upon shutdown.

Setting for:

Default setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice and

OtherSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set

to On.

This allows you to reset the CP300 to its default settings.

• The “Character Code” parameter setting does not change

(page 84).

• The “Memory Backup” parameter setting (On/Off) is

reset to the default setting (left column).

•You can specify whether the ﬁles in the storage memory

are erased or kept.

Never attempt to turn off the power during factory set. Doing so

could result in damage to the data.

Selecting for storage memory:

Equalizer Lock

Memory Backup

Master Master settings (page 53)

Transpose Transpose settings (page 69)

Equalizer Master Equalizer settings (page 72)

ReverbOnOff Reverb on or off (page 35)

SplitPoint Split Point settings (page 69)

Main/LeftVoice Voice, Keyboard part combinations

(page 27)

SongSetting Settings for Song recording and playback

(page 85)

MidiSetting MIDI Settings (page 63)

OtherSetting Other Settings (page 67)

EqualizerLock

Off

NO YES

MemoryBackUp

Transpose Off

NO YES

Selects the desired item

Selects on or off

Factory Set

MemoryFileExcluded Memory Songs are kept.

MemoryFileIncluded Memory Songs are erased.

CAUTION

FactorySet Execute?-->

MemoryFileExcluded

NO YES

Resets the CP300

Selects whether the memory ﬁles

are erased or kept

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Master Equalizer Settings

This section explains how to set the Master Equalizer using the Master EQ Edit menu.

n This setting is retained even after you turn off the power to the CP300. If you set the Memory Backup’s Equalizer setting to Off in

the Other Settings menu, the Master Equalizer settings will return to the default (initial) values when you turn on the power the

next time (page 71).

1 Use the MASTER EQ EDIT [▼][▲] buttons to show the Master EQ Edit display.

2 Set the Master Equalizer type by using the MASTER EQ EDIT [▼][▲] buttons or the

B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] buttons.

Setting range: Mellow 1 – 3, Normal, Bright 1 – 3, Edit

Default setting: Edit

3 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the parameter item.

4 Use the D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

The contents of the EQ parameters are brieﬂy explained below.

*1 You can also set the EQ Gain by moving the [MASTER EQUALIZER] slider. Keep in mind that the most recently made

settings will be effective.

*2 You can specify the range of the gain from -12 dB to +12 dB on MIDI Input. The display will also indicate from -12 dB

to +12 dB.

n If the “Equalizer Lock” parameter (page 71) in the Other Settings menu is turned on, the Master Equalizer settings

will not be affected by selecting a Performance, or by Song playback and incoming MIDI data.

Parameter name Contents Data Range

Low Gain EQ low-range gain

-9 dB – +9 dB

Low Freq. EQ low-range frequency 32 Hz – 2.0 kHz

Low Q EQ low-range resonance 0.1 – 12.0

LowMid Gain EQ low-middle range gain

-9 dB – +9 dB

LowMid Freq. EQ low-middle frequency 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz

LowMid Q EQ low-middle resonance 0.1 – 12.0

Mid Gain EQ middle range gain

-9 dB – +9 dB

Mid Freq. EQ middle frequency 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz

Mid Q EQ middle resonance 0.1 – 12.0

HighMid Gain EQ high-middle range gain

-9 dB – +9 dB

HighMid Freq. EQ high-middle frequency 100 Hz – 10.0 kHz

HighMid Q EQ high-middle resonance 0.1 – 12.0

High Gain EQ high range gain

-9 dB – +9 dB

High Freq. EQ high frequency 500 Hz – 16.0 kHz

High Q EQ high resonance 0.1 – 12.0

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

Speciﬁes the type

Speciﬁes the item

Speciﬁes the value

MASTER EQ EDIT

[▼][▲] buttons

Equalizer Edit

LowGain 0dB

NO YES

Master Equalizer type

Parameter name Parameter value

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Using the Performance Functions

The Performance functions allow you to store edited Voices, including Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI

transmit/receive channel settings and Master Edit settings, to the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. Once they

have been saved, the Performances can instantly be recalled from the panel. Refer to the section “Handling Performance Files”

on page 76.

You can save up to a total of 64 Performances to the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. A single button can

contain four different Performances, A – D.

To select the desired Performance (A – D), use the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons.

Performance ﬁle

A Performance ﬁle is a single ﬁle that includes the data of 64 Performances.

The current Performance, along with data of 64 Performances, is saved to the storage memory. For details

about recalling a Performance ﬁle from storage memory, refer to page 79.

Terminology

Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save Performance ﬁles and recorded Songs.

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VARIATION

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

Performance

• Dual/Split settings

•Voice and effect parameters

• MIDI transmit/receive channel

settings

• Master Edit settings

Switch the Performance

(A – D)

Performance ﬁle = 64 Performances

Performance D (16 Performances)

Performance C (16 Performances)

Performance B (16 Performances)

Performance A (16 Performances)

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

A01

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

Performance A

Performance B

Performance C

Performance D

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

Performance A

Performance B

Performance C

Performance D

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

Performance A

Performance B

Performance C

Performance D

VOICE/PERFORMANCE

Select the button

to save

Performance

Recalling a Performance ﬁle

from storage memory

Storage memory

Preset Performance ﬁle

= 64 Performances

Performance ﬁle

= 64 Performances

Performance ﬁle

= 64 Performances

Using the Performance Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

The useful Performance function enables you to store and recall all settings of the entire CP300 together,

including Dual/Split settings, Voice and effect parameters, MIDI transmit/receive channel settings and Master

Edit settings. Settings that can be edited and stored to a Performance are called “Performance parameters.”

Performance Parameters

Parameter menu Contents Parameter name Page

VOICE/

PERFORMANCE

Selecting a Voice

–25

Setting Dual – 29

SPLIT Setting Split – 31

REVERB Turning the Reverb on/off – 35

MASTER Turning the Master mode on/off – 39

TRANSPOSE Turning the Transpose on/off – 37

VOICE EDIT Setting the octave

Octave 58

Setting the volume level

Volume 58

Setting the position of right and left channels

Pan 58

Make ﬁne adjustments to the pitch (only in Dual mode)

Detune 58

Selecting the Reverb type

ReverbType 58

Setting the Reverb send

ReverbSend 58

Setting the Chorus type

ChorusType 59

Setting the Chorus send

ChorusSend 59

Turning the Chorus on/off

ChorusOnOff 59

Selecting the Insertion effect type

Ins.Type 59

Setting the speed of the Vibraphone vibrato effect

VibeRotorSpeed 59

Turning the Vibraphone vibrato effect on/off

VibeRotorOnOff 60

Setting the rotation speed of the rotary speed

RotarySpeed 60

Adjusting the Insertion effect depth

Dry/WetBalance 60

Adjusting the Brightness of the sound

Brightness 60

Adjusting the Resonance effect

HarmonicContent 60

Adjusting the low-range frequency of the Part equalizer

EQLowFreq. 60

Adjusting the high frequency of the Part equalizer

EQHighFreq. 61

Adjusting the low-range gain of the Part equalizer

EQLowGain 60

Adjusting the high range gain of the Part equalizer

EQHighGain 61

Setting the Touch Sensitivity

TouchSense 61

Setting the Pedal 1 function

Pedal1 61

Setting the Pedal 2 function

Pedal2 61

Setting the Pedal 3 function

Pedal3 61

Setting the Pedal 4 function

Pedal4 62

Setting the Modulation wheel function

Modulation 62

MASTER EQ EDIT Selecting the Master equalizer type

Edit or Master EQ type

name

Adjusting the low-range gain of the Master equalizer

LowGain

Adjusting the low-middle range gain of the Master equalizer

LowMidGain

Adjusting the middle range gain of the Master equalizer

MidGain

Adjusting the high-middle range gain of the Master equalizer

HighMidGain

Adjusting the high range gain of the Master equalizer

HighGain

Adjusting the low-range frequency of the Master equalizer

LowFreq.

Adjusting the low-middle frequency of the Master equalizer

LowMidFreq.

Adjusting the middle frequency of the Master equalizer

MidFreq.

Adjusting the high-middle frequency of the Master equalizer

HighMidFreq.

Adjusting the high frequency of the Master equalizer

HighFreq.

Using the Performance Functions

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

*1 The value of the parameter varies depending on the Dual (page 29) and Split (page 31) settings.

*2 The value of the parameter varies depending on the Split settings (page 31).

*3 If the Equalizer Lock parameter in the Other Settings menu is turned on, recalling a Performance from the panel will

not update the parameter settings (page 71).

MASTER EQ EDIT Adjusting the low-range resonance of the Master equalizer

LowQ 72

Adjusting the low-middle resonance of the Master equalizer

LowMidQ

Adjusting the middle resonance of the Master equalizer

MidQ

Adjusting the high-middle resonance of the Master equalizer

HighMidQ

Adjusting the high resonance of the Master equalizer

HighQ

MIDI SETTING Setting the MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 65

Setting the MIDI receive channel MidiInChannel 65

Turning Local Control on/off LocalControl 65

Selecting Performance from the keyboard or Song data for

MIDI transmission

MidiOutSelect 65

OTHER SETTING Selecting the Touch Response TouchResponse 68

Selecting a tuning curve for a Piano Voice PianoTuningCurve 68

Selecting a scale Scale 68

Specifying the Split Point (Main) SplitPoint (Main) 69

Specifying the Split Point 2 (Layer) SplitPoint2 (Layer) 69

Changing the key Transpose 69

Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal SoftPedalDepth 69

Setting the depth of String Resonance StringResonanceDepth 69

Setting the depth of Sustain Sampling for the Sustain pedal SustainSamplingDepth 69

Specifying the volume of the Key-off sound KeyOffSamplingDepth 70

Selecting a pedal function for Vibraphone Voice VibraphonePedalMode 70

Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal PedalPlay/Pause 70

Setting the point at which the Sustain pedal starts to affect the

sound

HalfPedalPoint 70

Setting the Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 70

MASTER EDIT Assigning a function to the [ZONE CONTROL] slider Slider 54

Setting the MSB of the Send Bank Select message SendBankMsb 54

Setting the LSB of the Send Bank Select message SendBankLsb 54

Setting the Program Change message SendPG# 54

Setting the octave of the external tone generator Octave 55

Turning the internal tone generator on/off InterITG 55

Setting the MIDI transmit channel when the Master mode is

turned on

MidiOutChannel 55

Parameter menu Contents Parameter name Page

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handling Performance Files

File displays (accessed via the [PERFORM.FILE] button) enable you to handle and organize ﬁles (e.g., save, delete and

rename Performance ﬁles) from the display.

A message (information or conﬁrmation prompt) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 94 for an explanation of each message, along with the appropriate actions

to take.

1 Prepare the ﬁle(s) for handling.

When using the Performance or Save As parameters:

Select the edited Voice or Performance ﬁle you want to save.

When using the Perf. Name, Rename File, Load From Mem. and Delete File parameters:

No operations necessary; go on to Step 2 below.

2 Press the [PERFORM.FILE] button to enter the Performance File settings.

3 Select the desired item by pressing the [PERFORM.FILE] button or by using the A [–]

[+] buttons.

To close the Performance File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

4 Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] buttons to change the value.

For details about each operation, refer to pages 77 – 80.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Performance File settings.

Setting Parameter name Page

Saving a Performance Performance 77

Renaming a Performance Perf.Name 78

Saving as a Performance ﬁle SaveAs 79

Recalling the Performance ﬁle from the storage memory LoadFromMem. 79

Deleting a Performance ﬁle DeleteFile 80

Renaming a Performance ﬁle RenameFile 80

Performance File—Basic Operation

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

2, 3

544

Performance Set?-->

A01.Piano+Pad

NO YES

Handling Performance Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving a Performance—Performance

You can save the edited Performance to one of the VOICE/PERFORMANCE [1] – [16] buttons. For details

about the parameters you can store to a Performance and their contents, refer to the “Performance Parameters”

list (page 74). The Performance data is stored to storage memory as a Performance ﬁle. For instructions on

recalling a Performance ﬁle from storage memory, refer to page 79.

If you create a Performance by editing an existing Preset Performance ﬁle, a new Performance ﬁle named

“PresetPerformance.PER” will be made. The Preset Performance ﬁle is not overwritten; however, the edited

Performance can be overwritten without any warning. To avoid overwriting the data, save it as another Performance ﬁle

with the Save As operation or rename the Performance ﬁle with Rename File.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Select the desired Performance by using the VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons or the C [–]

[+] buttons.

The location for saving the Performance can be speciﬁed from A01 to D16.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed”

message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous display.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

CAUTION

Performance Set?-->

A01.Piano+Pad

NO YES

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

A01

Performance ﬁle = 64 Performances

Performance D (16 Performances)

Performance C (16 Performances)

Performance B (16 Performances)

Performance A (16 Performances)

Save

CAUTION

Handling Performance Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Renaming a Performance—Perf. Name

This allows you to rename the Performance.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Renaming a Performance.

To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 20 characters for a Performance name.

You can change the type of characters on the display using the “Character Code” parameter in the Song

File menu.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved. When the operation is complete, a “Completed”

message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous display.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

Perf.Name Set?-->

A01.Piano+Pad

NO YES

CAUTION

Handling Performance Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving as a Performance File—Save As

This allows you to save the Performance ﬁle as another ﬁle, under another ﬁle name.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Name the Performance as described in the “Perf.Name” section (page 78).

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

If storage memory contains one or more Performance ﬁles, and you save a Performance ﬁle, the CP300

automatically sorts the Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

Recalling the Performance File from the Storage Memory—Load From Memory

This allows you to recall the Performance ﬁle from storage memory. A single Performance ﬁle consists of 64

separate Performances. The Performance ﬁle in the current memory will be replaced with the selected

Performance ﬁle in the storage memory.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the desired Performance ﬁle to be loaded.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

n The Performance ﬁle loaded from the storage memory is effective after restarting the CP300.

SaveAs Execute?-->

001.PresetPerformance

NO YES

CAUTION

LoadFromMem. Execute?-->

001.PresetPerformance

NO YES

CAUTION

Handling Performance Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting a Performance File—Delete File

This allows you to delete a Performance ﬁle from the CP300’s storage memory. It is not possible to delete a

Preset Performance ﬁle and current Performance ﬁle.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may damage the data of the Performance.

n The Performance ﬁle in the current memory cannot be deleted. After you delete a Performance ﬁle, the CP300

automatically updates the Performance ﬁle numbers.

Renaming a Performance File—Rename File

You can rename a Performance ﬁle in the storage memory. You cannot change the Preset Performance ﬁle.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 76.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Name the Performance ﬁle as described in the “Perf.Name” section (page 78).

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

After you rename a Performance, the CP300 sorts Performance ﬁles alphabetically and renumbers them.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the Performance ﬁle to be deleted.

DeleteFile Execute?-->

001.MyPerformance.PER

NO YES

CAUTION

RenameFile Execute?-->

001.MyPerformance.PER

NO YES

CAUTION

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Handling Song Files

File displays (accessed via the [SONG FILE] button) enable you to handle and organize ﬁles (e.g., save, delete and rename

Song ﬁles) and change characters from the display.

A message (information or conﬁrmation prompt) sometimes appears on the display to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 94 for an explanation of each message, along with troubleshooting

information and the appropriate actions to take.

1 Prepare the ﬁle(s) for handling.

When using the Save To Memory, Rename Song and Delete Song parameters:

Use the SONG SELECT [N] [O] buttons to select the target Song.

When using the Character Code parameter:

No operations necessary; go on to Step 2 below.

2 Press the [SONG FILE] button to access the Song File settings.

3 Select the desired item by pressing the [SONG FILE] button or by using the A [–][+]

buttons.

To close the Song File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

4 Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] button to execute the job or change the value.

For details about each operation, refer to pages 82 – 84.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit the Song File settings.

Setting Parameter name Page

Saving recorded Songs to the CP300’s storage memory SaveToMemory 82

Deleting a Song from the CP300’s storage memory DeleteSong 83

Renaming Song ﬁles RenameSongs 83

Changing the type of characters in display CharacterCode 84

Terminology

Song ﬁle: On the CP300, a Song ﬁle includes both Song data and a Song number.

Song File—Basic Operation

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTI NG

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

2, 3 3

1 4

RenameSong Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

Handling Song Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Saving Recorded Songs to the CP300’s Storage Memory—Save To Memory

This allows you to save recorded Songs to the CP300’s storage memory. Keep in mind that when you turn off

the power to the CP300, your recorded Song data will be lost. To permanently save the recorded Song, you

must save it to the CP300’s storage memory.

The Save To Memory operation is not available for Preset Songs.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 81.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Name the Song.

To move the cursor (small underline), use the C [–][+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–][+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–][+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 58 characters for a Song name. If the name is longer than the display, use the C [–][+]

buttons to move the cursor and scroll through the name.

You can change the type of characters on the display using the “Character Code” parameter (page 84).

4-2 Press the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the recorded Song to be deleted.

The Song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” stands for “Memory” and “xx” is a number.

If storage memory contains one or more Songs, and you save a new Song, the CP300 automatically sorts the

Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

SaveToMemory Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

Current memory

This is a temporary memory area

where you can temporarily place

and edit the currently selected

Song before playback or recording.

A recorded

Song

Storage memory

This is a memory area that provides space for saving

recorded Songs that would normally be lost when

you turn off the power.

Memory

Song

Preset

Song

Save

CAUTION

Handling Song Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Deleting a Song from the CP300’s Storage Memory—Delete Song

This allows you to delete a Song from the CP300’s storage memory. It is not possible to delete a Preset Song.

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 85.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Use the C [–][+] buttons to select a Song to delete.

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may damage the data of the recorded Song.

n After you delete a Song, the CP300 automatically updates the Song numbers.

Renaming Song Files—Rename Song

This allows you to rename Song ﬁles. The titles of any Songs can be changed, with the exception of the Preset

Songs and “P-000:NewSong.”

For basic operation instructions, refer to page 81.

The following steps are detailed instructions for Step 4 (in the Basic Operation above).

4-1 Name the Song as described in the Save To Memory operation (page 82).

4-2 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job.

After you rename a Song, the CP300 sorts all Songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

Never attempt to turn the [POWER] switch OFF while the “Executing” message is shown in the display. Turning

the power off in this state may cause the recorded Song to be deleted.

DeleteSong Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

CAUTION

RenameSong Execute?-->

M-001:NewSong.MID

NO YES

CAUTION

Handling Song Files

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Changing the Type of Characters in Display—Character Code

This allows you to change the type of characters that appear on display. The instructions below correspond to

Step 4 in the Basic Operation on page 81.

4 Use the D [–][+] buttons to select “International” or “Japanese.”

Settings: International, Japanese

Character List

Japanese

International

n File names using the characters shown in gray above will not display correctly if the Character Code setting has

been changed.

n The Character Code setting is also reﬂected in the display for the Performance and Performance ﬁle names.

CharacterCode

International

NO YES

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Settings for Song Recording and Playback—

Song Settings

From this menu, you can make detailed settings for the selected Song. First, select the desired Song (page 49).

1 Press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the Song Settings menu.

2 Select the desired item by pressing the [SONG SETTING] button or by using the

A [–][+] buttons.

3 Use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)] to D [–][+] buttons to execute the job or change the value.

Press the [–][+] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset to the default setting.

4 Press the B [+ (YES)] button to execute the job, if an “Execute?” or “Start?” prompt

appears.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to display the conﬁrmation prompt (“Sure?”).

To proceed, press the B [+ (YES)] button again. An “Executing” message appears and the data is saved.

When the operation is complete, a “Completed” message appears brieﬂy, then returns to the previous

display.

To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button instead of the B [+ (YES)] button.

5 Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Song Settings menu.

n Save the edited Song data by using the “Save To Memory” operation in the Song File menu.

Song Settings—Basic Operation

NO YES

EXIT

MASTER

PERFORMANCE

MASTER EDIT

PERFORM.FILE

TRANSPOSE

SONG SELECT

NEW SONG

REC

STOP

PLAY/PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

SONG VOICE/PERFORMANCE

3-16

TRACK

SONG FILE

SONG SETTING

MIDI OUT PANEL LOCK

DOWN UP

TEMPO

CONTRAST

GRAND

PIANO 1

GRAND

PIANO 2

MONO

PIANO

E. PIANO 1 E. PIANO 2 E. PIANO 3

CLAVI.

VIBES

ORGAN 1 ORGAN 2 HARPSI. STRINGS CHOIR/PAD

GUITAR

BASS

12345678

910111213141516

VOICE EDIT

SPLIT

VARIATION

REVERB

CHORUS SPEAKER MI DI SETTING

MASTER EQ EDIT

CLICK

OTHER SETTING

DEMO

1, 2 3

3, 4

Quantize Execute?-->

Off

NO YES

Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Parameters

This allows you to correct the timing of notes you’ve

recorded. For example, if the timing of your performance

was slightly off in places, you can adjust the notes to precise

eighth or sixteenth notes. Changes made in Quantize affect

the entire Song.

Quantize timing settings (according to note value):

Off

If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Swing Rate

parameter is shown (as a percentage value). Changing the

Swing Rate will make the Song sound more lively and give it

more of a swing or jazzy feel.

Setting range: 0% – 100%

If you select “1/8” for correction:

Default setting: Off

This allows you to specify whether a Song that starts at a

point other than the ﬁrst beat of the ﬁrst measure should be

played from the ﬁrst actual note or from the beginning of

the Song. (Some Songs are recorded with initial settings and

non-note data at the very beginning of the Song; this

parameter allows you to skip those settings and play the

Song from the ﬁrst note. It also allows you to skip over rests

that naturally occur before the pickup note in a Song.)

Settings:

Default setting: On

This allows you to select and audition the recorded contents

of a single channel. Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16

Default setting: Ch 1

n Song data consists of 16 channels. Each instrument part is

assigned to a speciﬁc channel, so for this instrument, the

words “channel” and “track” have the same meaning.

n Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.

However, for some Songs, all channels (including the

channels that contain no data) may be displayed.

This allows you to delete data of a single speciﬁed channel,

or of all 16 channels at once.

Setting range: Ch 1 – Ch 16, ALL (all channels)

Default setting: Ch 1

n Song data consists of 16 channels. Each instrument part is

assigned to a speciﬁc channel, so for this instrument, the

words “channel” and “track” have the same meaning.

Quantize

Quantize Execute?-->

SwingRate= 50% 1/8

NO YES

Changes the swing rate Selects the notes for which

you can adjust the timing

1/4 .............

1/8 .............

1/12 ...........

1/16 ...........

1/24 ...........

Quarter note

Eighth note

Eighth note triplets

Sixteenth note

Sixteenth note triplets

Your keyboard performance

Swing rate = 50%: No swing; straight

Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher): The timing of even beat

notes is slightly delayed.

Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower): The timing of even beat notes

is slightly early.

Swing rate = 67%: The timing of even beat notes is moved to

the third beat of the triplets.

Quick Play

On Playback from the ﬁrst note

Off Playback from the start of the Song (including a rest

or blank measure)

Channel Listen

Channel Clear

QuickPlay

NO YES

ChannelListen Start?-->

Ch1

NO YES

ChannelClear Execute?-->

Ch1

NO YES

Settings for Song Recording and Playback—Song Settings

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

n Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.

However, for some Songs, all channels (including the

channels that contain no data) may be displayed.

n When you clear all channels using the “ALL” parameter,

you can overwrite the Song. In this case, an empty Song

ﬁle having no channel data is saved.

This allows you to specify a section within a Song and play

it back repeatedly. The section can be speciﬁed freely (in

measures/beats), and playback repeats after it reaches the

point just prior to the beat speciﬁed as the end point.

If you start playing back a Song with “Repeat On” selected,

a lead-in count starts, followed by the repeated playback of

the speciﬁed part until you press the [STOP] button. If you

select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.

Settings: RepeatOn, RepeatOff

Default setting: RepeatOff

If you select “Repeat On,” use the C [–][+] and D [–][+] buttons

to specify the range to be repeated during Song playback.

n When you select another Song, the speciﬁed range is

automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned

off.

This allows you to repeatedly play back all Songs or a single

Song selected from storage memory.

When you start playback, the CP300 plays the Song you

selected from the front panel, then starts repeat playback of

the speciﬁed Songs until you press the [STOP] button.

Press the [STOP] button to return to the top of the Song.

Settings:

Default setting: PresetSongs

This allows you to set the time signature of the click.

Specify the numerator of the time signature by using the

C [–][+] buttons and specify the denominator by using the

D [–][+] buttons. For example, to specify 3/4 time, use the

C [–][+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–][+] buttons to

select “4.”

Setting range for the numerator: 1 – 16

Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, 8

Default setting: 4/4

This allows you to set volume of the click sound.

Setting range: 0 – 127

Default setting: 100

This allows you to select whether the click sound has a bell

accent, or plays only a click sound.

Setting range:

Default setting: BellOff

From/To Repeat

Song Repeat

PresetSongs All Preset Songs

All All Memory Songs and Preset Songs

OneSong One Song selected from the front panel

MemorySongs All recorded Songs

FromToRepeat RepeatOff

From 001:001 To 002:001

NO YES

SongRepeat Off

PresetSongs

NO YES

Time Signature

Click Volume

Click Type

BellOff Click (standard click sound)

BellOn Click and bell

TimeSignature

4/ 4

NO YES

ClickVolume

100

NO YES

ClickType

BellOff

NO YES

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

The CP300 has built-in speakers. You can also monitor the sound of the instrument by using external

equipment. Connect a set of headphones, powered speakers, or other playback equipment as required.

There are several methods of connecting to external audio equipment, as described in the following

illustrations. The following illustrations show various connection examples; use the one most similar to your

intended setup.

Connecting Stereo Powered Speakers

For optimum, accurate reproduction of the instrument’s rich sounds, effects and full stereo image, use a pair of

powered speakers. Connect the powered speakers to the OUTPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.

n When using just one powered speaker, connect it to the OUTPUT L/MONO jack on the rear panel.

n If you are connecting only to the L/MONO jack and want to use a Piano Voice, we recommend that you use the

Mono Piano 1 or Mono Piano 2 Voice for best results.

First, make sure that all volume settings are turned down all the way to the minimum. Then turn on the every

device in your setup in the order of MIDI master (controllers), MIDI slaves (receivers), then audio equipment

(mixers, ampliﬁers, speakers, etc.).

When powering down the setup, ﬁrst turn down the volume for each audio devices, then switch off each device in

the reverse order (ﬁrst audio devices, then MIDI).

Connecting to External Audio Equipment

CAUTION

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

1 2 3

POWER

ON!!

MIDI master CP300 Audio equipment (ﬁrst mixer,

then ampliﬁer)

CP300

Powered speaker (Left)

Powered speaker (Right)

Headphones

OUTPUT L/MONO jack OUTPUT R jack

PHONES

jack

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting to a Mixer

These are extra audio outputs in addition to the main OUTPUT L/R jacks.

The CP300 also features professional-use balanced XLR connectors for the OUTPUT L/R jacks. This type of

connector is used in professional studio equipment and installations.

n • Connecting a pair of headphones does not affect audio output from the OUTPUT L/R and OUTPUT L/

MONO, R jacks. You can adjust the volume of the external audio equipment, built-in speakers or headphones

with the [MASTER VOLUME] dial.

• The sound monitored through the headphones is identical to the sound of the OUTPUT L/R and OUTPUT L/

MONO, R jacks.

The CP300 also features a set of INPUT jacks. The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected

to these jacks, allowing you to play the sound of an external instrument through the CP300’s speakers.

Connect the outputs from the other instrument to the INPUT L/MONO and R jacks on the rear panel.

The sound of an instrument connected to these INPUT jacks cannot be adjusted from the CP300. Any level

adjustments must be done from the instrument itself.

About the OUTPUT L/R jacks

These XLR connectors carry a balanced signal output, and are intended for use in professional studios

and installations. If the corresponding circuitry is designed properly, however, XLR-type connectors will

also handle unbalanced signals with no problem. Microphone cables usually have this type of connector,

as do the inputs and outputs of most professional audio gear.

Connecting to External Equipment

OUTPUT L

OUTPUT R

CP300

Powered

speaker

(Left)

Powered

speaker

(Right)

Headphones

OUTPUT L jack OUTPUT R jack

PHONES

jack

Mixer

Ampliﬁer

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

CP300

External MIDI synthesizer/tone generator

OUTPUT L/MONO jack OUTPUT R jack

INPUT L/MONO jack INPUT R jack

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Using a standard MIDI cable (available separately), you can connect an external MIDI device, and control it

from the CP300. Likewise, you can use an external MIDI device (such as a keyboard or sequencer) to control

the sounds on the CP300. Below are several different MIDI connection examples; use the one most similar to

your intended setup.

n The CP300 cannot receive or transmit MIDI start (FAh), Continue (FBh), or Stop (FCh) messages.

Controlling from an External MIDI Keyboard

Use an external keyboard or synthesizer (such as the MOTIF ES) to remotely select and play the Voices of the

CP300.

n The CP300 can playback commercially available Song data or Song data created for other instruments or on a

computer. For details about MIDI data compatibility, refer to page 100.

n In order to have an external MIDI device control separate parts of the CP300’s internal tone generator, you’ll need

to change the “MIDI In Channel” parameter in the MIDI Setting menu. For details, refer to page 65.

Connecting to External MIDI Equipment

MIDI Transmit Channel and Receive Channel

Make sure to match the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI instrument with the MIDI

Receive Channel of the CP300. For details on setting the MIDI Transmit Channel of the external MIDI

instrument, refer to the Owner’s Manual of the MIDI instrument.

When setting the MIDI Receive Channel of the CP300, conﬁrm the MIDI Receive Channel for each

part and change the settings of the desired parts, if necessary, to match the MIDI Transmit Channel

settings on the external MIDI instrument. (Refer to page 65.)

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

CP300

External MIDI synthesizer such as MOTIF ES

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Controlling an External MIDI Keyboard

This connection lets you play the sounds of an external MIDI tone generator (synthesizer, tone generator

module, etc.) from the keyboard of the CP300. Use this connection to play the sounds of the connected

instrument in a layer with the CP300, or use the sophisticated Zone functions (page 39) to set up splits in the

sounds.

Controlling Another MIDI Device via MIDI THRU

MIDI THRU simply re-transmits the MIDI messages received via MIDI IN. In the example below, the MIDI

messages generated by playing an external keyboard are transmitted to an external tone generator via the MIDI

THRU connector on the CP300. The MIDI data of your performance on the CP300 are transmitted to an

external device via the MIDI OUT connector on the CP300.

Splitting the Sound between the CP300 and an External Tone Generator by MIDI

Channel

Using the connection example shown above, you can play both instruments and have them separately

sound different parts. To use this feature, you must set the CP300’s output channel and the external tone

generator’s receive channel to the same channel number. Set the MIDI Transmit Channel via the “MIDI

Out Channel” parameter in the MIDI Settings menu while turning on the power (page 65). While the

Master mode is turned on, set the MIDI Transmit Channel via the “MIDI Out Channel” parameter in

the Master Edit menu (page 55).

CP300

External MIDI keyboard or synthesizer,

such as the S/SY/EX series

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER

CP300

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

MIDI IN MIDI THRU

External MIDI keyboard

External MIDI tone

generator

External MIDI synthesizer

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Connecting this instrument to a computer via MIDI opens up a whole world of musical possibilities—such as

using sequencer software to record and play back compositions with the CP300 sounds.

Using a USB Cable

MIDI messages can be transferred between the sequencer software and CP300 using the USB cable. However,

audio data cannot be transmitted or received via USB on the CP300.

When the USB connector is connected, the MIDI connectors cannot be used.

Connecting to a Computer

In order to use the instrument with a computer via a USB connection, you will need to install an

appropriate USB-MIDI driver. You can download the proper driver from our website:

http://download.yamaha.com

• Information on system requirements can also be found on the above web page

• The USB-MIDI driver may be revised and updated without prior notice. Before installing, visit the above web page

to confirm the latest related information and ensure that you have the most up-to-date version.

Precautions when using the USB connector

When connecting the computer to the USB connector, make sure to observe the following points. Failing

to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or even losing the data. If the computer or the

instrument freezes, turn the power to the instrument off or restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB connector, exit from any power-saving mode (such as suspended, sleep, standby)

of the computer.

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB connector.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the

USB connector.

- Quit any open applications (such as Voice Editor, Multi Part Editor, and sequencer software).

- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the

keyboard or playing back a song.)

• While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1)

when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

• Use a USB cable less than 3 meters in length.

Selecting Voices from a Computer

You can select Voices on this instrument from your computer software by specifying the following MIDI

messages.

• Bank Select MSB

• Bank Select LSB

• Program Change

For details on what values are assigned to the Voice Bank/Number of this synthesizer, refer to the

“Program Change List” on page 105.

CP300

USB connector

USB cable

Computer with a USB interface

CAUTION

Connecting to a Computer and Other MIDI Devices

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Reference

Using Local On/Off when connected to a computer

When connecting the CP300 to a computer, the keyboard performance data is generally sent to the computer,

and then returned from the computer to play the tone generator block on the CP300. If the Local Control

parameter in the MIDI Settings menu is set to “on,” a “double” sound may result, since the CP300 tone

generator is receiving performance data from both the keyboard directly and the computer.

Use the setting suggestions below as a guideline; speciﬁc instructions may differ depending on your computer

and the software used.

When MIDI Echo (MIDI Thru) is enabled on the software/computer:

n When transmitting or receiving System Exclusive data (such as with the Bulk Dump function), use the setting

example below, making sure that MIDI Echo on the computer software is set to “off.”

When MIDI Echo (MIDI Thru) is disabled on the software/computer:

* MIDI Echo is a function on sequencers that takes any data received via the MIDI IN and “echoes” it (or sends it as is) through the MIDI

OUT. In some software, this function is also called “MIDI Thru.”

n For details about MIDI Echo, refer to the owner’s manual of your particular software.

CP300

[MIDI SETTING] Local Control = Off Echo back = on

Computer (SQ01, etc.)

USB connector

Out

Tone generator Keyboard

Out

Local off

CP300

[MIDI SETTING] Local Control = On Echo back = on

USB connector

Out

Tone generator Keyboard

Local on

Computer (SQ01, etc.)

Message List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Description

Bulk data reception has been completed.

This is shown following the “Bulk Data Receiving Voice” message. This indicates that the

instrument ﬁnished receiving bulk data, and that you can go on to the next step.

Bulk data reception has failed.

Check that the cable connection is secure and try again.

The instrument is receiving bulk data while this message is displayed.

Wait until the message closes, then go on to the next step.

The instrument failed to transmit the bulk data.

If this message appears, make sure that the power of your computer has not been turned

off, that the cable is connected correctly, and that the driver on your computer is functioning

correctly. Then try transmitting the data once again.

This is shown when the operation has been canceled.

The operation is completed.

This is shown following the “Executing” message. The instrument’s internal processing is

complete. You can go on to the next step.

The ﬁle format is invalid.

This message appears when the Performance ﬁle selected via “Load From Mem.” (page 79)

is invalid and cannot be called up.

The Song name or Performance name is duplicated.

You tried to save a Song ﬁle after changing its name using the “Rename Song” (page 83), or

a Performance ﬁle after changing its name using the “Rename File” (page 80) parameter,

but a Song or Performance with the same name already exists in memory. The instrument

returns to the previous display after three seconds. Rename the Song correctly.

Do you wish to execute the operation?

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button

to save the settings. Press the B [– (NO)] or [EXIT] button to cancel.

The instrument is processing the data internally.

Wait until the message closes, then proceed to the next step.

The factory default settings, excepting ﬁles stored to storage memory (refer to

“Factory Set” on page 71), have been restored.

This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to

the instrument (page 17).

The factory default settings, including ﬁles stored to storage memory (refer to

“Factory Set” on page 71), have been restored.

This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the

power to the instrument (page 17).

BulkDataReceiving

Completed

BulkDataReceiving

Error

BulkDataReceiving

BulkDump Error

Canceled

Completed

DataFmtErr

DuplicatedName

Execute?-->

Executing

FactorySet Completed

MemoryFileExcluded

FactorySet Completed

MemoryFileIncluded

Message List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

The instrument’s ﬂash memory (storage memory) has expired.

Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the instrument will not be able to back

up the Songs, Performance ﬁles and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to

the original display.

There is a problem with the USB connector.

The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, or the driver

or MIDI application on the computer is working incorrectly. In this situation, turn the power off

to both the instrument and the computer, and check the cable connection. Then, turn on the

power to the computer and the instrument in this order and check to see if the driver and

MIDI application on the computer work properly.

This message is also shown if the USB cable is connected to the instrument without being

connected to your computer. When you wish to use the instrument alone, turn off the power

of the instrument, disconnect the USB cable from the instrument, then turn the power on

again. If the cable is left connected in this condition, the instrument may not function

properly.

The power was incorrectly turned off the previous time. The instrument is

checking the internal memory.

You turned off the power to the instrument while it was writing data to storage memory. This

message appears next time you turn on the power. The internal memory is being checked

while this message is displayed. If it has been conﬁrmed that any ﬁles in the storage

memory are corrupted, all the ﬁles will be deleted.

Some ﬁles in the storage memory have been restored.

This message appears following the message “Last Power Off Illegal / Memory File

Checking,” indicating that the instrument recovered as much data in the storage memory as

possible.

Files on the storage memory have been deleted.

This message appears following the message “Last Power Off Illegal / Memory File

Checking,” indicating that the instrument could not recover data in the storage memory and

that all memory ﬁles were deleted.

A memory problem has occurred.

While a Song or a Performance ﬁle was being loaded, the instrument detected defects in

memory. Reset the instrument to its normal (factory default) settings with “Memory File

Included” (page 71) after you back up all Song data.

There may be a memory problem.

1. This message indicates that there may be a problem with the memory when selecting a

Song or Performance ﬁle. If the message appears repeatedly when you continue using

the instrument, back up the Song data, then restore the default setting by using “Memory

File Included” in “Factory Set” (page 71).

2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was

when you assigned the Performance ﬁle name. In this case, switch the “Character

Code,” re-select the Performance ﬁle.

There is no more available space in storage memory.

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more Songs or

Performance ﬁles. Delete some Songs or Performance ﬁles in the storage memory (pages

80, 83), then save the new data to memory.

There is no Song to be saved.

This message will appear if there is no Song for the “Save To Memory” (page 82) operation

to save. In this case, no Song will be saved.

There is no ﬁle to be deleted.

You tried to delete a ﬁle that does not exist in the storage memory. You cannot delete the ﬁle.

There is no Song to be deleted.

You tried to delete a Song that does not exist in the storage memory. The Song cannot be

deleted.

Message Description

FlashMemoryLifeTime

Exit-->

HostError

LastPowerOffIllegal

MemoryFileChecking

LastPowerOffIllegal

MemoryFileErrorRecovered

LastPowerOffIllegal

MemoryFileErased

MemoryError

MemoryFull

NoSong

NoFileToDelete

NoSongToDelete

Message List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Do you want to overwrite the data?

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with

new data. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to

cancel.

Please wait.

You tried to start playing a Song or perform another operation right after selecting the Song.

Wait until the message closes.

This is a protected ﬁle.

You tried to copy or delete data in internally-protected ﬁles (such as commercially available

music data). You cannot write to, copy, or delete such ﬁles.

This is a protected Song.

This message appears when you try to change the name of an internally-protected Song

(Preset Song). You cannot change the name of such Songs.

Is the setting maintained?

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings or not.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

The Song has been changed. Do you wish to save the Song?

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded Song to storage memory.

If you continue the operation, the recorded Song will be lost. To delete the new recording,

press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The “Save

To Memory” (page 82) parameter is shown in the display. Save the Song then try the

operation again.

An error has been found in the Song data.

1. The instrument has found some defects in the selected (or playing) Song. Select the

Song and play it again. If you still see this message, the Song data may be damaged.

2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was

when you assigned the Song name. In this case, switch the “Character Code,” re-select

the Song, and play it back.

The Song data is too large.

1. The Current memory space has become full during recording. Recording stops

automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears

when you try to enter recording mode to perform additional recording but the Song data

has already ﬁlled the current memory. In this case, you cannot perform additional

recording. Use the “Channel Clear” parameter (page 86) to delete unnecessary tracks (if

any) to make more room in memory.

2. The size of the selected Song is larger than the current memory. The instrument cannot

load/play the selected Song. Select another Song.

3. This message is shown when you edit a Song if that Song is larger than the capacity of

the current memory. This Song cannot be edited on the instrument.

Do you wish to start the operation?

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button.

Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

Are you sure?

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to

continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

MIDI bulk data is being transmitted.

This message appears when the instrument receives a bulk request from a computer. This

message appears while the bulk data is being transmitted. Wait until the message closes,

then go on to the next step. Please wait.

Bulk data transmission has been completed.

This is shown following the “Transmitting” message. It is displayed when the transmission of

the bulk data has been completed. You can go on to the next step.

Message Description

OverWrite?

PleaseWait

ProtectedFile

ProtectedSong

Set?-->

SongChanged Save?

SongError

SongTooBig

Start?-->

Sure?-->

Transmitting

Completed

Message List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

MIDI Bulk data is being transmitted.

This message appears when the instrument receives a bulk request from a computer. The

instrument has failed to transmit Voice bulk data.

Check the cable connection and repeat the procedure from the beginning.

The Song name or Performance ﬁle name is not appropriate.

1. This message appears when you have used a period or space at the beginning of a

Song name/Performance ﬁle (while handling a Song/Performance ﬁle), or you have tried

to change a Song name by including a character (or characters) not supported by the

instrument. The instrument returns to previous display after three seconds. Make sure to

enter a valid name.

2. This message will appear if a different “Character Code” (page 84) is selected than was

when you assigned the Song name or Performance ﬁle name. In this case, switch the

“Character Code,” re-select the Song or Performance ﬁle.

Message Description

Transmitting

Error

WrongName

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible causes Solution

The power of the instrument does

not turn on.

The instrument has not been plugged in

properly.

Securely insert the female plug into the

socket on the instrument, and the male plug

into a proper AC outlet (page 11).

A click or pop is heard when the

power is turned on or off.

This is normal when electrical current is

being applied to the instrument.

This is normal.

Noise is heard from the instrument's

speakers.

The noise may be due to interference

caused by the use of a mobile phone in

close proximity to the instrument.

Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further

away from the instrument. Using a mobile

phone in close proximity to the instrument

may produce interference.

The overall volume is too low, or

there is no sound at all.

The [MASTER VOLUME] (page 13) may be

set too low.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level.

The [ZONE CONTROL] (page 28) may be

set too low.

Raise the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.

Speaker setting may be off. Turn on the [SPEAKER] button (page 52).

“Local Control” (page 65) may be set to off. Set “Local Control” to on.

“Internal TG” (page 55) may be set to off. Set “Internal TG” to on.

The pedal or the Modulation wheel is set to

minimum, when “Expression” is assigned to

the foot controller or Modulation wheel.

Change the position of the pedal or

Modulation wheel.

“Expression” may have been assigned to

one of the connected footswitches.

Assign any function other than “Expression”

to the footswitch.

The gain setting of the Master EQ (page 36)

may be low.

Raise the gain of the Master EQ.

The gain of the Part EQ (page 36) may be

low.

Raise the gain of the Part EQ.

“Volume” may have been assigned to the

[ZONE CONTROL] slider while the Master

mode is turned on, the [ZONE CONTROL]

may be set too low.

Raise the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.

The keyboard volume is low. The volume level for the keyboard

Performance may be set too low.

Raise any of the [ZONE CONTROL] slider.

The Song playback volume is low. The volume of the Song playback may be

set too low.

Raise the [SONG VOLUME] slider.

The speakers do not switch off when

a pair of headphones is connected.

Speaker setting may be On. Set the Speaker setting to Off.

The pitch and/or tone of the Piano

Voices in certain ranges do not

sound right.

The Piano Voices attempt to precisely

simulate actual piano sounds. However, as

a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in

some ranges may sound exaggerated,

producing a somewhat different pitch or

tone.

This is normal.

Mechanical noise is heard during

Performance.

The keyboard mechanism of this instrument

simulates the keyboard mechanism of an

actual piano. Mechanical noise is also heard

on a piano.

This is normal.

The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some

buttons not used for the function are

disabled.

If a Song is playing or recording, stop

playback or recording. Otherwise, press the

[EXIT] button to return to the main display,

and then perform the desired operation.

The Panel Lock function is effective. Rapidly press the [PANEL LOCK] button

twice to cancel the Panel Lock.

Troubleshooting

CP300 Owner’s Manual

Appendix

The sound sustains and does not

decay while pressing the pedal to

which the sostenuto function is

assigned.

For Voices in the ORGAN, STRINGS,

CHOIR, PAD, and XG groups, the sound

continues sustaining while you are holding

down the sostenuto pedal.

This is normal.

Higher or lower notes do not sound

correctly when the transpose or

octave setting is made.

The setting range for the transposition and

octave setting is C-2 – G8. (With the normal

setting, the 88 keys of this instrument cover

the range of A-1 – C7.) If the lowest key is

set to a note lower than C-2, it will produce a

sound one octave higher. If the highest key

is set to a note higher than G8, it will

produce a sound one octave lower.

This is normal.

The tempo does not change even

though the Song was recorded with

tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes,

the tempo change may not have been

recorded. In this case, the recording will be

played back at the original tempo. Make

tempo changes when the recording track is

selected and a red track indicator is

ﬂashing. The same method applies to

editing the tempo after recording.

This is normal. Check the location of the

tempo change.

Performance in Dual or Split mode

is not recorded, and one or more

tracks have been unexpectedly

deleted.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the

recording track for the Layer part Voice or

the Left part Voice is automatically assigned

(page 48). Therefore, if the track already has

data, the data will be overwritten during

recording. Also, the actual process of

switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the

middle of the Song is not recorded.

Therefore, the notes you played with the

Layer part Voice or the Left part Voice are

not recorded.

This is normal.

Cannot change the time signature in

the Song after recording.

The time signature cannot be changed in

the middle of the measure.

Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of

the Song, use the B [– (NO)][+ (YES)]

buttons to locate the measure in which you

wish to change the time signature, and then

change it.

The Song title is not correct. The “Character Code” setting may be

different than that used when you named the

Song.

Use the “Character Code” parameter

(page 84) in the [SONG FILE] button to

change the setting.

The Performance title is not correct. The “Character Code” parameter setting

(page 84) has been changed from the one

set when naming the Performance ﬁle.

Make sure that the “Character Code”

parameter is set to the same one as set

when the Performance ﬁle was named.

Problem Possible causes Solution

CP300 Owner’s Manual

100

Appendix

MIDI Data Compatibility

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the items below.

Voice allocation format

With MIDI, Voices are assigned to speciﬁc numbers, called “program numbers.” The numbering standard

(order of Voice allocation) is referred to as the “Voice allocation format.” Voices may not play back as expected

unless the Voice allocation format of the Song data matches that of the compatible MIDI device used for

playback.

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common Voice allocation formats. Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM

System Level 1. Most commercially available music data is created as Format 0 “GM System Level 1.”

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format, and was developed by Yamaha speciﬁcally

to provide more Voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over Voices and effects, and to

ensure compatibility of data well into the future. Song data recorded on the instrument using Voices in

the XG category is XG-compatible.

CP300 Owner’s Manual

101

Appendix

Factory Setting List

Voice settings [VOICE EDIT]

All the Voice settings differ depending on the current Voice.

MIDI settings [MIDI SETTING]

Other settings [OTHER SETTING]

Parameter name Settings Value Page

MidiOutChannel Setting the MIDI transmit channel Main: Ch 1

Left: Ch 2

Layer: Ch 3

Left Layer: Ch 4

MidiInChannel Setting the MIDI receive channel Ch 1 – 16: Song

Ch 17: Keyboard

Ch 18: Main

Ch 19: Left

Ch 20: Layer

Ch 21: Left Layer

Ch 22 – 32: Off

LocalControl Turning local control on/off On 65

MidiOutSelect Selecting performance from the keyboard or Song data for

MIDI transmission

Keyboard 65

ReceiveParameter Selecting the types of data received via MIDI All data: On 66

TransmitParameter Selecting the types of data transmitted via MIDI All data: On 66

IntialSetup Transmitting the initial settings on the panel — 66

BulkDump Executing Voice data bulk dump Current 66

Parameter name Settings Value Page

TouchResponse Selecting the touch response Medium 68

Tune Fine tuning the pitch A3 = 440.0 Hz 68

PianoTuningCurve Selecting a tuning curve for a Piano Voice Stretch 68

Scale Selecting a scale Equal 68

SplitPoint Specifying the Split Point (Main) F#269

SplitPoint2 Specifying the Split Point 2 (Layer) F#269

Transpose Changing the key Keyboard = 0

Song = 0

SoftPedalDepth Adjusting the depth of the Soft pedal 5 69

StringResonanceDepth Setting the depth of String Resonance 5 69

SustainSamplingDepth Setting the depth of Sustain Sampling for the Sustain pedal 5 69

KeyOffSamplingDepth Specifying the volume of the Key-off sound 5 70

VibraphonePedalMode Selecting a pedal function for Vibraphone Voice PianoLike 70

PedalPlay/Pause Assigning the SONG [PLAY/PAUSE] function to the pedal All pedals: Off 70

PedalType Selecting a pedal type Pedal 1, Pedal 2, Pedal

3: Make; Pedal 4: Break

Factory Setting List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

102

Appendix

Master settings [MASTER EDIT]

Settings for Song recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

HalfPedalPoint Setting the point at which the sustain pedal starts to affect

the sound

070

PitchBendRange Setting the Pitch Bend range 2 70

EqualizerLock Locking the Master Equalizer settings On 71

MemoryBackUp Selecting items saved at shutdown Transpose,

Main/Left Layer,

OtherSetting: Off,

Others: On

FactorySet Restoring the default settings MemoryFileExcluded 71

Parameter name Settings Value Page

Slider Assigning a function to the [ZONE CONTROL] slider VOLUME 54

SendBankMsb Setting the MSB of the Send Bank Select message 0 54

SendBankLsb Setting the LSB of the Send Bank Select message 0 54

SendPG# Setting the Program Change message 1 54

Octave Setting the octave of the external tone generator 0 55

InterITG Turning the internal tone generator on/off On 55

MidiOutChannel Setting the MIDI transmit channel when the Master mode is

turned on

Zone 1: Ch 1,

Zone 2: Ch 2,

Zone 3: Ch 3,

Zone 4: Ch 4

Parameter name Settings Value Page

Quantize Correcting note timing.

Determining how strongly the notes will be quantized.

Off 86

SwingRate 50%

QuickPlay Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with

the ﬁrst voicing

On 86

ChannelListen Auditioning the channels Ch 1 86

ChannelClear Deleting data from each channel Ch 1 86

FromToRepeat Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly RepeatOff 87

SongRepeat Playing back a Song/all Songs repeatedly PresetSongs 87

TimeSignature Setting the Click time signature 4/4 87

ClickVolume Setting the Click volume level 100 87

ClickType Setting the Click bell sound BellOff 87

Parameter name Settings Value Page

CP300 Owner’s Manual

103

Appendix

Voice List

Voice group Voice name Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GrandPiano1 Grand Piano 1 ØØØ Ø ØThis sound was sampled from a full concert

grand piano. Three stages of dynamics were

sampled, and no effort has been spared in

making the sound virtually identical to that of an

acoustic piano. Even the tonal changes

produced by the damper pedal and the subtle

sounds of releasing a key are reproduced. The

sympathetic vibration (string resonance) that

occurs between the strings of an acoustic piano

has also been simulated. Suitable not only for

classical compositions but also for piano pieces

of any style.

Mellow Piano 1 ØØØ Ø ØA warm and mellow piano sound. Ideal for

classical music.

Rock Piano ØØØ Ø ØA bright-sounding piano. Ideal for rock styles.

HonkyTonk Piano ØØØ Ø ØA honky-tonk style piano. Enjoy a tonal

character that is quite different than a grand

piano.

GrandPiano2 Grand Piano 2 ØØ– – –A spacious and clear piano sound with a bright

resonance. Ideal for popular music.

Mellow Piano 2 ØØ – – –A mellow piano sound with a different character

than Mellow Piano 1.

Mono Piano Mono Piano 1 –ØØ – –The sound of a mono piano. Good for ensemble

performance.

Mono Piano 2 –Ø– – –A mono piano sound with a different character

than Mono Piano 1.

Comp. Piano 1 –ØØ – –A mono piano sound with compression effect.

Comp. Piano 2 –Ø– – –A mono piano sound with a different character

than Comp. Piano 1.

E.Piano1 Chorus E.Piano –ØØØ –The sound of an electric piano that generates

sound by striking metal tines with a hammer.

Softly played notes will have a mellow character,

and strongly played notes will sound more

forceful. A chorus effect is applied to create

warmth.

Phaser E.Piano –ØØØ –A distinctive phaser effect makes this ideal for

fusion styles.

AutoPan E.Piano –ØØØ –An electric piano with a characteristic panning

effect.

Standard E.Piano –ØØØ –A straightforward electric piano sound with

reverb as the only effect.

E.Piano2 DX E.Piano 1 ØØØ – –The sound of an electronic piano as simulated

by an FM synthesizer such as the DX7.

Differences in playing dynamics will affect the

tone. Ideal for popular songs.

DX E.Piano 2 –Ø– – –An FM synthesizer electronic piano sound using

a different algorithm than DX E.Piano 1, with a

bright sounding character.

Synth Piano –Ø– – –This Voice simulates the electric piano sound

produced by synthesizers in popular music. It

also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

E.Piano3 Tremolo Vintage

E.P.

–ØØ – –The sound of an electric piano of a different type

than E.Piano 1, often used in rock and popular

music.

Vintage E.Piano –ØØ – –An electric piano sound with a vintage

character, and reverb as the only effect.

Amp.Sim. Vintage

E.P.

–ØØ – –The sound of an electric piano distorted by an

amp simulator effect. Ideal for rock music.

Voice List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

104

Appendix

Clavi. Phaser Clavi. –Ø– Ø –This is the Voice of a keyboard that produces

sound by striking the strings with magnetic

pickups. This funky sound is popular in

contemporary soul and R&B music. Because of

its unique structure, the instrument produces a

peculiar sound when you release the keys.

Clavi. 1 –Ø– Ø –A struck-string keyboard instrument with

electromagnetic pickups. A straightforward

sound with only reverb applied.

Wah Clavi. –Ø– Ø –Includes a distinctive wah effect.

Clavi. 2 –Ø– Ø –A different type of Clavi. 1 sound.

Vibraphone Vibraphone ØØØ – –Vibraphone played with relatively soft mallets.

The tone becomes more metallic the harder you

play.

Marimba ØØ – – –A marimba sound, sampled in stereo for

spaciousness and realism.

Celesta ØØØ – –The sound of a celesta—a percussion

instrument in which hammers strike metallic

bars to produce sound.

Organ1 Jazz Organ ––– – –The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.

Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

Theater Organ ––– – –A bright electric organ sound.

Rock Organ ––– – –An aggressive electric organ sound, ideal for

rock.

Draw Organ ––– – –A standard electric organ sound.

Organ2 Pipe Organ

Principal

Ø–– – –This Voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

Pipe Organ Tutti Ø– – – –This Voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccata

and Fugue in D Minor by Bach.

Pipe Organ Flute Ø–– – –A pipe organ sound that combines ﬂute-type

(woodwind type) stops of different pitches

(8'+4'). This is a gentle sound that is ideal for

accompanying hymns.

Harpsichord Harpsichord 8 Ø–– Ø –The sound of the instrument frequently used in

baroque music. Variations in playing touch will

not affect the volume, and a characteristic

sound will be heard when you release the key.

Harpsichord 8'+4 Ø–– Ø –A harpsichord with an added upper octave.

Produces a more brilliant sound.

Strings Strings ØØ – – –Stereo-sampled, large-scale strings ensemble

with realistic reverb. Try combining this Voice

with piano in the Dual mode.

Synth Strings ØØ – – –A bright and spacious strings sound. Suitable

for sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

Slow Strings ØØ– – –The sound of a string ensemble, with a slow

attack. Suitable for use in Dual mode with

GRAND PIANO or E.PIANO.

Choir/Pad. Choir –Ø– – –A big, spacious choir Voice. Perfect for creating

rich harmonies in slow pieces.

Slow Choir –Ø– – –The sound of a choir with a slow attack. Suitable

for use in Dual mode with GRAND PIANO or

E.PIANO.

Scat –ØØ – –You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this Voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

Synth Pad 1 –Ø– – –A warm, mellow, and spacious synth sound.

Ideal for sustained parts in the background of

an ensemble.

Voice group Voice name Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

CP300 Owner’s Manual

105

Appendix

Program Change List

P.C.# = Program Change number (1-128)

When you specify a program change as a number in the range of 0-127, specify a number that is one less than the program number listed

below. For example, to specify program number 128, you would actually enter program change 127.

For details about XG Voices, refer to the XG Voice List (page 108).

Choir/Pad. Synth Pad 2 –Ø– – –A clear and spacious synth sound. Ideal for

sustained parts in the background of an

ensemble.

Guitar Nylon Guitar ØØØ – –A warm and natural nylon-string guitar sound.

Enjoy the atmosphere it adds to a quiet song.

Steel Guitar –Ø– – –A bright steel guitar sound. Ideal for popular

music.

Bass Wood Bass –Ø– – –The sound of a ﬁnger-plucked upright bass.

Frequently used in jazz and Latin music.

Bass&Cymbal –Ø– – –The sound of a cymbal has been layered onto

the bass. Effective when used for jazz walking-

bass lines.

Electric Bass –Ø– – –The sound of an electric bass. Frequently used

in jazz, rock, and popular music.

Fretless Bass –Ø– – –The sound of a fretless bass. Suitable for styles

such as jazz and fusion.

Voice group Voice name Bank

MSB

Bank

LSB

P.C.# Voice group Voice name Bank

MSB

Bank

LSB

P.C.#

GrandPiano1

Grand Piano 1 0 122 1

Organ1

Jazz Organ 0 122 17

Mellow Piano 1 0 123 1 Theater Organ 0 124 17

Rock Piano 0 122 3 Rock Organ 0 122 19

HonkyTonk Piano 0 122 4 Draw Organ 0 125 17

GrandPiano2

Grand Piano 2 0 112 1

Organ2

Pipe Organ Principal 0 123 20

Mellow Piano 2 0 114 1 Pipe Organ Tutti 0 122 20

Mono Piano

Mono Piano 1 0 123 2 Pipe Organ Flute 0 124 20

Mono Piano 2 0 114 2

Harpsichord

Harpsichord 8' 0 122 7

Comp. Piano 1 0 124 2 Harpsichord 8'+4' 0 123 7

Comp. Piano 2 0 116 2

Strings

Strings 0 122 49

E.Piano1

Chorus E.Piano 0 122 5 Synth Strings 0 122 51

Phaser E.Piano 0 124 5 Slow Strings 0 122 50

AutoPan E.Piano 0 125 5

Choir/Pad.

Choir 0 122 53

Standard E.Piano 0 126 5 Slow Choir 0 123 53

E.Piano2

DX E.Piano 1 0 122 6 Scat 0 122 54

DX E.Piano 2 0 123 6 Synth Pad 1 0 122 90

Synth Piano 0 122 89 Synth Pad 2 0 122 92

E.Piano3

Tremolo Vintage E.P. 0 123 5

Guitar

Nylon Guitar 0 122 25

Vintage E.Piano 0 121 5 Steel Guitar 0 122 26

Amp.Sim.Vintage E.P. 0 120 5

Bass

Wood Bass 0 122 33

Clavi.

Phaser Clavi. 0 124 8 Bass&Cymbal 0 124 33

Clavi. 1 0 122 8 Electric Bass 0 122 34

Wah Clavi. 0 123 8 Fretless Bass 0 122 36

Clavi. 2 0 125 8 XG 480 Voices – – –

Vibraphone

Vibraphone 0 122 12

Marimba 0 122 13

Celesta 0 122 9

Voice group Voice name Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

CP300 Owner’s Manual

106

Appendix

Preset Performance List

Number Performance name Type Voices used Performance discription

Main Layer Left Left Layer

A01 Piano+Pad Dual GrandPiano1 WarmPad Grand piano layered with a

warm-sounding pad. Usable in

a variety of situations from rapid

passages to ballads.

A02 Piano+E.Piano Dual GrandPiano1 ChorusE.P. Widely-used layered sound with

piano and electric piano. Ideal

for 80’s pop.

A03 Piano+DX E.P.1 Dual GrandPiano1 DX E.Piano1 Widely-used layered sound with

piano and DX electric piano.

Enjoy harmonies with the

sparkling electric piano.

A04 Piano+DX E.P.2 Dual GrandPiano2 DX E.Piano2 Another type of layered piano

and DX electric piano.

A05 Piano+SoftStr Dual GrandPiano2 S.SlwStr Piano layered with soft strings.

A06 HonkyTonkPiano Dual GrandPiano1 GrandPiano1 Honky-tonk piano that simulates

slight detuning.

A07 E.Piano+Pad Dual AutoPanE.P. SynthPad1 Auto-panned electric piano

layered with a soft pad.

Beautifully spacious stereo

spread.

A08 E.Piano+DX E.P. Dual StandardE.P DX E.Piano1 Layered electric piano and DX

electric piano.

A09 E.Piano+SlowStr Dual ChorusE.P. SlowStrings Chorused electric piano layered

with slow attack strings.

A10 E.Piano+

Vintage E.P.

Dual StandardE.P VintageE.P. Standard electric piano layered

with vintagetype electric piano.

A11 DX E.P.+SoftStr Dual DX E.Piano2 S.SlwStr DX electric piano layered with

soft strings.

A12 DX E.P.+

SynthPiano

Dual DX E.Paino2 SynthPiano DX electric piano layered with

synth piano.

A13 PipeOrgan+Choir Dual PipeOrganTu Choir Magniﬁcent layered sound with

pipe organ and chorus.

A14 Strings+Choir Dual Strings Choir Classical layered sound with

strings and chorus.

A15 Orchestral Harp Dual NylnHarp Harp Beautiful layered sound of two

harps, slightly delayed.

A16 PolySynthPad Dual PolySyPd NewAgePd Dense and rich motion pad.

Key-on modiﬁes the sound.

B01 WoodBass/

GrandPiano

Split GrandPiano1 Wood Bass Standard wood bass split with

piano. Ideal for playing jazz by

yourself.

B02 WoodBass/

NylonGuitar

Split Nylon Guitar Wood Bass Nylon-string guitar split with

wood bass.

B03 WoodBass/

VibraPhone

Split Vibraphone Wood Bass Standard wood bass split with

vibraphone.

B04 Bass+Cym/

JazzOrgan

Split JazzOrgan

Bass & Cymbal

Play rhythm with bass and

cymbal in the left hand, and

solo organ in the right hand.

B05 E.Bass/PhaserE.P. Split Phaser E.Piano Electric Bass Electric piano with phaser

(typical of 70’s fusion), split with

electric bass.

B06 Bass+Cym/Scat Split Scat

Bass & Cymbal

Play scat in the right hand, and

bass and cymbal in the left.

Scat sounds are velocity-

switched.

Preset Performance List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

107

Appendix

The 32 Performances in variations C, D use the Grand Piano 1 Voice.

B07 Organ Upper/Lower Dual+Split JazzOrgan SoloSine Jazz Organ Simulates a dual-manual organ.

Play chords in the left hand, and

solo with the right.

B08 E.Piano/GrandPiano Split GrandPiano1 Phaser E.Piano Play chords in the left hand on

an electric piano with phaser

applied, and piano solo in the

right.

B09 JazzOrg/GrandPiano Split GrandPiano1 Jazz Organ Play organ backing in the left

hand, and piano solo in the

right.

B10 SynBass/SynBrass Dual+Split SynBrss1 SynBrss1

SynBass1Dark

Play synth bass in the left hand,

and bright synth brass in the

right.

B11 Delay E.Piano Single

Standard

E.Piano

Electric piano with delay

applied to create a sense of

space.

B12 Room Piano Single GrandPiano1 Piano that sounds as if heard at

a distance in a spacious room.

B13 Old piano Single GrandPiano2 Simulation of a piano sound

heard on an old record. Distorts

slightly as you play harder.

B14 Baroque Ensemble Dual+Split Hc8'+4' PipeOrganP Strings Choir Play strings and chorus in the

left hand, and harpsichord and

pipe organ in the right.

B15 AOR Split Dual+Split GrandPiano2 SynthPad1 E.Bass MuteGtr Rich sound that lets you play

muted guitar and bass in the left

hand, and piano and pad in the

right.

B16 Drum Kit Drm StandardKit1 The CP300 provides high-

quality drum sounds as well as

piano sounds. Try out your

drumming skills!

Number Performance name Type Voices used Performance discription

Main Layer Left Left Layer

CP300 Owner’s Manual

108

Appendix

XG Voice List

Bank Select MSB=00

KSP Stereo Single Slow Fast Decay Double Attack Bright Dark Resonant Attack

Instrument

Group

Pgm#

Bank 0

Bank Select LSB=00

Bank 0 E Bank 1 E Bank 3 E Bank 6 E Bank 8 E Bank 12 E Bank 14 E Bank 16 E Bank 17 E Bank 18 E Bank 19 E Bank 20 E Bank 24 E

Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano GrandPno 2 GrndPnoK 1 MelloGrP 2

2 Bright Acoustic Piano BritePno 2 BritPnoK 1

3 Electric Grand Piano El.Grand 2 ElGrPnoK 2

4 Honky-tonk Piano HnkyTonk 2 HnkyTnkK 2

5 Electric Piano 1 E.Piano1 2 El.Pno1K 1 MelloEP1 2

6 Electric Piano 2 E.Piano2 2 El.Pno2K 1

7 Harpsichord Harpsi. 1 Harpsi.K 1

8 Clavi Clavi. 2 Clavi K 1

Chromatic

Percussion

9 Celesta Celesta 1

10 Glockenspiel Glocken 1

11 Music Box MusicBox 2

12 Vibraphone Vibes 1 Vibes K 1

13 Marimba Marimba 1 MarimbaK 1

14 Xylophone Xylophon 1

15 Tubular Bells TubulBel 1

16 Dulcimer Dulcimer 1

Organ 17 Drawbar Organ 1 DrawOrgn 1

18 Percussive Organ PercOrgn 1 70sPcOr1 2

19 Rock Organ RockOrgn 2

20 Church Organ 1 ChrchOrg 2

21 Reed Organ ReedOrgn 1

22 Accordion Acordion 2

23 Hamonica Harmnica 1

24 Tango Accordion TangoAcd 2

Guitar 25 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1 NylonGtr 1 NylonGt2 1

26 Acoustic Guitar (steel) SteelGtr 1 SteelGt2 1

27 Electric Guitar (jazz) Jazz Gtr 1 MelloGtr 1

28 Electric Guitar (clean) CleanGtr 1

29 Electric Guitar (muted) Mute.Gtr 1

30 Overdriven Guitar Ovrdrive 1

31 Distortion Guitar Dist.Gtr 1

32 Guitar Harmonics GtrHarmo 1

Bass 33 Acoustic Bass Aco.Bass 1

34 Electric Bass (ﬁnger) FngrBass 1 FingrDrk 2

35 Electric Bass (pick) PickBass 1

36 Fretless Bass Fretless 1

37 Slap Bass 1 SlapBas1 1

38 Slap Bass 2 SlapBas2 1

39 Synth Bass 1 SynBass1 1 SynBa1Dk 1 FastResB 1 AcidBass 1

40 Synth Bass 2 SynBass2 2 MelloSBa 1 Seq Bass 2 ClkSynBa 2 SynBa2Dk 1

Strings 41 Violin Violin 1 Slow Vln 1

42 Viola Viola 1

43 Cello Cello 1

44 Contrabass Contrabs 1

45 Tremolo Strings Trem.Str 1 SlwTrStr 1

46 Pizzicato Strings Pizz.Str 1

47 Orchestral Harp Harp 1

48 Timpani Timpani 1

Ensemble 49 String Ensemble 1 Strings1 1 S.Strngs 2 Slow Str 1 Arco Str 2

50 String Ensemble 2 Strings2 1 S.SlwStr 2 LegatoSt 2

51 Synth Strings 1 Syn.Str1 2

52 Synth Strings 2 Syn.Str2 2

53 Choir Aahs ChoirAah 1 S.Choir 2 Ch.Aahs2 2

54 Voice Oohs VoiceOoh 1

55 Synth Voice SynVoice 1

56 Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit 2

Brass 57 Trumpet Trumpet 1 Trumpet2 1 BriteTrp 2

58 Trombone Trombone 1 Trmbone2 2

59 Tuba Tuba 1 Tuba 2 1

60 Muted Trumpet Mute.Trp 1

61 French Horn Fr. Horn 2 FrHrSolo 1

62 Brass Section 1 BrasSect 1

63 Synth Brass 1 SynBrss1 2 Quack Br 2 RezSynBr 2 PolyBrss 2

64 Synth Brass 2 SynBrss2 1 Soft Brs 2

Reed 65 Soprano Sax SprnoSax 1

66 Alto Sax Alto Sax 1

67 Tenor Sax TenorSax 1

68 Baritone Sax Bari.Sax 1

69 Oboe Oboe 2

70 English Horn Eng.Horn 1

71 Bassoon Bassoon 1

72 Clarinet Clarinet 1

Pipe 73 Piccolo Piccolo 1

74 Flute Flute 1

75 Recorder Recorder 1

76 Pan Flute PanFlute 1

77 Blown Bottle Bottle 2

78 Shakuhachi Shakhchi 2

79 Whistle Whistle 1

80 Ocarina Ocarina 1

Synth Lead 81 Lead 1 (square) SquareLd 2 SquarLd2 1 LMSquare 2 Hollow 1 Shroud 2

82 Lead 2 (sawtooth) Saw Ld 2 Saw Ld 2 1 ThickSaw 2 Dyna Saw 1 Digi Saw 2 Big Lead 2 HeavySyn 2

83 Lead 3 (calliope) CaliopLd 2

84 Lead 4 (chiff) Chiff Ld 2

85 Lead 5 (charang) CharanLd 2

86 Lead 6 (voice) Voice Ld 2 SynthAah 2

87 Lead 7 (ﬁfths) Fifth Ld 2

88 Lead 8 (bass+lead) Bass&Ld 2 Big&Low 2

Synth Pad 89 Pad 1 (new age) NewAgePd 2

90 Pad 2 (warm) Warm Pad 2 ThickPad 2 Soft Pad 2 Sine Pad 2

91 Pad 3 (polysynth) PolySyPd 2

92 Pad 4 (choir) ChoirPad 2

93 Pad 5 (bowed) BowedPad 2

94 Pad 6 (metallic) MetalPad 2

95 Pad 7 (halo) Halo Pad 2

96 Pad 8 (sweep) SweepPad 2 Shwimmer 2

Synth Effects 97 FX 1 (rain) Rain 2

98 FX 2 (soundtrack) SoundTrk 2

99 FX 3 (crystal) Crystal 2 SynDrCmp 2 Popcorn 2 TinyBell 2

100 FX 4 (atmosphere) Atmosphr 2 WarmAtms 2 HollwRls 2

101 FX 5 (brightness) Bright 2

102 FX 6 (goblins) Goblins 2

103 FX 7 (echoes) Echoes 2 Echoes 2 2 Echo Pan 2

104 FX 8 (sci-ﬁ) Sci-Fi 2

Ethnic 105 Sitar Sitar 1

106 Banjo Banjo 1

107 Shamisen Shamisen 1

108 Koto Koto 1

109 Kalimba Kalimba 1

110 Bagpipe Bagpipe 2

111 Fiddle Fiddle 1

112 Shanai Shanai 1

Percussive 113 Tinkle Bell TnklBell 2

114 Agogo Agogo 2

115 Steel Drums SteelDrm 2

116 Woodblock Woodblok 1

117 Taiko Drum TaikoDrm 1

118 Melodic Tom 1 MelodTom 2

119 Synth Drum Syn Drum 1

120 Reverse Cymbal RevCymbl 1

Sound Effects 121 Guitar Fret Noise FretNoiz 2

122 Breath Noise BrthNoiz 2

123 Seashore Seashore 2

124 Bird Tweet Tweet 2

125 Telephone Ring Telphone 1

126 Helicopter Helicptr 1

127 Applause Applause 1

128 Gunshot Gunshot 1

: Same as Bank 0 : No sound E: Element number

XG Voice List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

109

Appendix

Release Rezo Sweep Muted Detune 1 Detune 2 Detune 3 Octave 1 Octave 2 5th 1 5th 2 Bend Tutti

Instrument

Group

Pgm#

Bank 0

Bank Select LSB=00

Bank 0 E Bank 25 E Bank 27 E Bank 28 E Bank 32 E Bank 33 E Bank 34 E Bank 35 E Bank 36 E Bank 37 E Bank 38 E Bank 39 E Bank 40 E

Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano GrandPno 2 PianoStr 2

2 Bright Acoustic Piano BritePno 2

3 Electric Grand Piano El.Grand 2 Det.CP80 2 LayerCP1 2

4 Honky-tonk Piano HnkyTonk 2

5 Electric Piano 1 E.Piano1 2 Chor.EP1 2 HardEl.P 2

6 Electric Piano 2 E.Piano2 2 Chor.EP2 2 DX Hard 2 DXLegend 2 DX Phase 2

7 Harpsichord Harpsi. 1 Harpsi.2 2 Harpsi.3 2

8 Clavi Clavi. 2 ClaviWah 2

Chromatic

Percussion

9 Celesta Celesta 1

10 Glockenspiel Glocken 1

11 Music Box MusicBox 2

12 Vibraphone Vibes 1

13 Marimba Marimba 1

14 Xylophone Xylophon 1

15 Tubular Bells TubulBel 1

16 Dulcimer Dulcimer 1 Dulcimr2 2

Organ 17 Drawbar Organ 1 DrawOrgn 1 DetDrwOr 2 60sDrOr1 2 60sDrOr2 2 70sDrOr1 2 DrawOrg2 2 60sDrOr3 2 Even Bar 2 16+2"2/3 2

18 Percussive Organ PercOrgn 1

DetPrcOr 2 Lite Org 2 PercOrg2 2

19 Rock Organ RockOrgn 2

20 Church Organ 1 ChrchOrg 2 ChurOrg3 2 ChurOrg2 2 NotreDam 2

21 Reed Organ ReedOrgn 1

Puff Org 2

22 Accordion Acordion 2 AccordIt 2

23 Hamonica Harmnica 1 Harmo. 2 2

24 Tango Accordion TangoAcd 2

Guitar 25 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1 NylonGtr 1 NylonGt3 2

26 Acoustic Guitar (steel) SteelGtr 1 12StrGtr 2 Nyln&Stl 2

27 Electric Guitar (jazz) Jazz Gtr 1

Jazz Amp 2

28 Electric Guitar (clean) CleanGtr 1 ChorusGt 2

29 Electric Guitar (muted) Mute.Gtr 1 FunkGtr1 2

30 Overdriven Guitar Ovrdrive 1

31 Distortion Guitar Dist.Gtr 1 FeedbkGt 2

32 Guitar Harmonics GtrHarmo 1

Bass 33 Acoustic Bass Aco.Bass 1 JazzRthm 2

34 Electric Bass (ﬁnger) FngrBass 1

FlangeBa 2 Ba&DstEG 2

35 Electric Bass (pick) PickBass 1 MutePkBa 1

36 Fretless Bass Fretless 1 Fretles2 2 Fretles3 2 Fretles4 2

37 Slap Bass 1 SlapBas1 1 ResoSlap 1 PunchThm 2

38 Slap Bass 2 SlapBas2 1

39 Synth Bass 1 SynBass1 1 Clv Bass 2 TechnoBa 2

40 Synth Bass 2 SynBass2 2 SmthSynB 2 ModulrBa 2

Strings 41 Violin Violin 1

42 Viola Viola 1

43 Cello Cello 1

44 Contrabass Contrabs 1

45 Tremolo Strings Trem.Str 1 Susp.Str 2

46 Pizzicato Strings Pizz.Str 1

47 Orchestral Harp Harp 1 YangChin 2

48 Timpani Timpani 1

Ensemble 49 String Ensemble 1 Strings1 1 60sStrng 2 Orchestr 2

50 String Ensemble 2 Strings2 1 Warm Str 2

51 Synth Strings 1 Syn.Str1 2 Reso Str 2

52 Synth Strings 2 Syn.Str2 2

53 Choir Aahs ChoirAah 1 MelChoir 2 ChoirStr 2

54 Voice Oohs VoiceOoh 1

55 Synth Voice SynVoice 1 SyVoice2 2

56 Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit 2 OrchHit2 2

Brass 57 Trumpet Trumpet 1 Warm Trp 2

58 Trombone Trombone 1

59 Tuba Tuba 1

60 Muted Trumpet Mute.Trp 1

61 French Horn Fr. Horn 2 FrHorn 2 1 HornOrch 2

62 Brass Section 1 BrasSect 1 Tp&TbSec 2 BrssSec2 2

63 Synth Brass 1 SynBrss1 2 SynBrss3 2 JumpBrss 2

64 Synth Brass 2 SynBrss2 1 SynBrss4 2

Reed 65 Soprano Sax SprnoSax 1

66 Alto Sax Alto Sax 1 Sax Sect 2

67 Tenor Sax TenorSax 1 BrthTnSx 2

68 Baritone Sax Bari.Sax 1

69 Oboe Oboe 2

70 English Horn Eng.Horn 1

71 Bassoon Bassoon 1

72 Clarinet Clarinet 1

Pipe 73 Piccolo Piccolo 1

74 Flute Flute 1

75 Recorder Recorder 1

76 Pan Flute PanFlute 1

77 Blown Bottle Bottle 2

78 Shakuhachi Shakhchi 2

79 Whistle Whistle 1

80 Ocarina Ocarina 1

Synth Lead 81 Lead 1 (square) SquareLd 2

82 Lead 2 (sawtooth) Saw Ld 2 WaspySyn 2 PulseSaw 2

83 Lead 3 (calliope) CaliopLd 2

84 Lead 4 (chiff) Chiff Ld 2

85 Lead 5 (charang) CharanLd 2

86 Lead 6 (voice) Voice Ld 2

87 Lead 7 (ﬁfths) Fifth Ld 2 Big Five 2

88 Lead 8 (bass+lead) Bass&Ld 2

Synth Pad 89 Pad 1 (new age) NewAgePd 2

90 Pad 2 (warm) Warm Pad 2

91 Pad 3 (polysynth) PolySyPd 2

92 Pad 4 (choir) ChoirPad 2

93 Pad 5 (bowed) BowedPad 2

94 Pad 6 (metallic) MetalPad 2

95 Pad 7 (halo) Halo Pad 2

96 Pad 8 (sweep) SweepPad 2 Converge 2

Synth Effects 97 FX 1 (rain) Rain 2

98 FX 2 (soundtrack) SoundTrk 2 Prologue 2

99 FX 3 (crystal) Crystal 2 RndGlock 2 GlockChi 2

100 FX 4 (atmosphere) Atmosphr 2 Nylon EP 2

101 FX 5 (brightness) Bright 2

102 FX 6 (goblins) Goblins 2

103 FX 7 (echoes) Echoes 2

104 FX 8 (sci-ﬁ) Sci-Fi 2

Ethnic 105 Sitar Sitar 1 DetSitar 2 Sitar 2 2

106 Banjo Banjo 1 MuteBnjo 1

107 Shamisen Shamisen 1

108 Koto Koto 1

109 Kalimba Kalimba 1

110 Bagpipe Bagpipe 2

111 Fiddle Fiddle 1

112 Shanai Shanai 1

Percussive 113 Tinkle Bell TnklBell 2

114 Agogo Agogo 2

115 Steel Drums SteelDrm 2

116 Woodblock Woodblok 1

117 Taiko Drum TaikoDrm 1

118 Melodic Tom 1 MelodTom 2

119 Synth Drum Syn Drum 1

120 Reverse Cymbal RevCymbl 1

Sound Effects 121 Guitar Fret Noise FretNoiz 2

122 Breath Noise BrthNoiz 2

123 Seashore Seashore 2

124 Bird Tweet Tweet 2

125 Telephone Ring Telphone 1

126 Helicopter Helicptr 1

127 Applause Applause 1

128 Gunshot Gunshot 1

: Same as Bank 0 : No sound E: Element number

XG Voice List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

110

Appendix

Velo-Switch Velo-Xfade other wave

Instrument

Group

Pgm#

Bank 0

Bank Select LSB=00

Bank 0 E Bank 41 E Bank 42 E Bank 43 E Bank 45 E Bank 64 E Bank 65 E Bank 66 E Bank 67 E Bank 68 E Bank 69 E Bank 70 E Bank 71 E

Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano GrandPno 2 Dream 2

2 Bright Acoustic Piano BritePno 2

3 Electric Grand Piano El.Grand 2 LayerCP2 2

4 Honky-tonk Piano HnkyTonk 2

5 Electric Piano 1 E.Piano1 2 VX El.P1 2 60sEl.P1 1

6 Electric Piano 2 E.Piano2 2 DX+Analg 2 DXKotoEP 2 VX El.P2 2

7 Harpsichord Harpsi. 1

8 Clavi Clavi. 2 PulseClv 1 PierceCl 2

Chromatic

Percussion

9 Celesta Celesta 1

10 Glockenspiel Glocken 1

11 Music Box MusicBox 2 Orgel 2

12 Vibraphone Vibes 1 HardVibe 2

13 Marimba Marimba 1 SineMrmb 2

14 Xylophone Xylophon 1

15 Tubular Bells TubulBel 1

16 Dulcimer Dulcimer 1

Organ 17 Drawbar Organ 1 DrawOrgn 1 Organ Ba 1 70sDrOr2 2 CheezOrg 2 DrawOrg3 2

18 Percussive Organ PercOrgn 1

19 Rock Organ RockOrgn 2 RotaryOr 2 SloRotar 2 FstRotar 2

20 Church Organ 1 ChrchOrg 2 OrgFlute 2 TrmOrgFl 2

21 Reed Organ ReedOrgn 1

22 Accordion Acordion 2

23 Hamonica Harmnica 1

24 Tango Accordion TangoAcd 2 TngoAcd2 2

Guitar 25 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1 NylonGtr 1 VelGtHrm 2

26 Acoustic Guitar (steel) SteelGtr 1 Stl&Body 2

27 Electric Guitar (jazz) Jazz Gtr 1

28 Electric Guitar (clean) CleanGtr 1

29 Electric Guitar (muted) Mute.Gtr 1 MuteStlG 2 FunkGtr2 2 Jazz Man 1

30 Overdriven Guitar Ovrdrive 1 Gt.Pinch 2

31 Distortion Guitar Dist.Gtr 1 FeedbkG2 2

32 Guitar Harmonics GtrHarmo 1 GtFeedbk 1 GtrHrmo2 1

Bass 33 Acoustic Bass Aco.Bass 1 VXUprght 2

34 Electric Bass (ﬁnger) FngrBass 1 FngrSlap 2 FngBass2 2 Mod.Bass 2

35 Electric Bass (pick) PickBass 1

36 Fretless Bass Fretless 1

37 Slap Bass 1 SlapBas1 1

38 Slap Bass 2 SlapBas2 1 VeloSlap 2

39 Synth Bass 1 SynBass1 1 Orbiter 2 Sqr.Bass 1 RubberBa 2

40 Synth Bass 2 SynBass2 2 DX Bass 2 X WireBa 2

Strings 41 Violin Violin 1

42 Viola Viola 1

43 Cello Cello 1

44 Contrabass Contrabs 1

45 Tremolo Strings Trem.Str 1

46 Pizzicato Strings Pizz.Str 1

47 Orchestral Harp Harp 1

48 Timpani Timpani 1

Ensemble 49 String Ensemble 1 Strings1 1 Orchstr2 2 TremOrch 2 Velo.Str 2

50 String Ensemble 2 Strings2 1 Kingdom 2 70s Str 1 Strings3 1

51 Synth Strings 1 Syn.Str1 2 Syn Str4 2 Syn Str5 2

52 Synth Strings 2 Syn.Str2 2

53 Choir Aahs ChoirAah 1

54 Voice Oohs VoiceOoh 1

55 Synth Voice SynVoice 1 Choral 2 AnaVoice 1

56 Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit 2 Impact 2

Brass 57 Trumpet Trumpet 1

58 Trombone Trombone 1

59 Tuba Tuba 1

60 Muted Trumpet Mute.Trp 1

61 French Horn Fr. Horn 2

62 Brass Section 1 BrasSect 1 Hi Brass 2 MelloBrs 2

63 Synth Brass 1 SynBrss1 2 AnVelBr1 2 AnaBrss1 2

64 Synth Brass 2 SynBrss2 1 ChoirBrs 2 AnVelBr2 2 AnaBrss2 2

Reed 65 Soprano Sax SprnoSax 1

66 Alto Sax Alto Sax 1 HyprAlto 2

67 Tenor Sax TenorSax 1 SoftTenr 2 TnrSax 2 1

68 Baritone Sax Bari.Sax 1

69 Oboe Oboe 2

70 English Horn Eng.Horn 1

71 Bassoon Bassoon 1

72 Clarinet Clarinet 1

Pipe 73 Piccolo Piccolo 1

74 Flute Flute 1

75 Recorder Recorder 1

76 Pan Flute PanFlute 1

77 Blown Bottle Bottle 2

78 Shakuhachi Shakhchi 2

79 Whistle Whistle 1

80 Ocarina Ocarina 1

Synth Lead 81 Lead 1 (square) SquareLd 2 Mellow 2 SoloSine 2 SineLead 1

82 Lead 2 (sawtooth) Saw Ld 2 Dr. Lead 2 VeloLead 2

83 Lead 3 (calliope) CaliopLd 2 PureLead 2

84 Lead 4 (chiff) Chiff Ld 2 Rubby 2

85 Lead 5 (charang) CharanLd 2 DistLead 2 WireLead 2

86 Lead 6 (voice) Voice Ld 2 Vox Lead 2

87 Lead 7 (ﬁfths) Fifth Ld 2

88 Lead 8 (bass+lead) Bass&Ld 2 Fat&Prky 2 Soft Wrl 2

Synth Pad 89 Pad 1 (new age) NewAgePd 2 Fantasy 2

90 Pad 2 (warm) Warm Pad 2 Horn Pad 2 RotarStr 2

91 Pad 3 (polysynth) PolySyPd 2 PolyPd80 2 ClickPad 2 Ana. Pad 2 SquarPad 2

92 Pad 4 (choir) ChoirPad 2 Heaven 2 Itopia 2 CC Pad 2

93 Pad 5 (bowed) BowedPad 2 Glacier 2 GlassPad 2

94 Pad 6 (metallic) MetalPad 2 Tine Pad 2 Pan Pad 2

95 Pad 7 (halo) Halo Pad 2

96 Pad 8 (sweep) SweepPad 2 PolarPad 2 Celstial 2

Synth Effects 97 FX 1 (rain) Rain 2 ClaviPad 2 HrmoRain 2 AfrcnWnd 2 Carib 2

98 FX 2 (soundtrack) SoundTrk 2 Ancestrl 2

99 FX 3 (crystal) Crystal 2 ClearBel 2 ChorBell 2 SynMalet 1 SftCryst 2 LoudGlok 2 ChrstBel 2 VibeBell 2 DigiBell 2 AirBells 2 BellHarp 2

100 FX 4 (atmosphere) Atmosphr 2 NylnHarp 2 Harp Vox 2 AtmosPad 2 Planet 2

101 FX 5 (brightness) Bright 2 FantaBel 2

102 FX 6 (goblins) Goblins 2 GobSynth 2 Creeper 2 Ring Pad 2 Ritual 2 ToHeaven 2 Night 2 Glisten 2

103 FX 7 (echoes) Echoes 2 EchoBell 2 Big Pan 2 SynPiano 2 Creation 2 StarDust 2 Reso&Pan 2

104 FX 8 (sci-ﬁ) Sci-Fi 2 Starz 2

Ethnic 105 Sitar Sitar 1

106 Banjo Banjo 1

107 Shamisen Shamisen 1

108 Koto Koto 1

109 Kalimba Kalimba 1

110 Bagpipe Bagpipe 2

111 Fiddle Fiddle 1

112 Shanai Shanai 1 Shanai 2 1

Percussive 113 Tinkle Bell TnklBell 2

114 Agogo Agogo 2

115 Steel Drums SteelDrm 2

116 Woodblock Woodblok 1

117 Taiko Drum TaikoDrm 1

118 Melodic Tom 1 MelodTom 2 Mel Tom2 1 Real Tom 2 Rock Tom 2

119 Synth Drum Syn Drum 1 Ana Tom 1 ElecPerc 2

120 Reverse Cymbal RevCymbl 1

Sound Effects 121 Guitar Fret Noise FretNoiz 2

122 Breath Noise BrthNoiz 2

123 Seashore Seashore 2

124 Bird Tweet Tweet 2

125 Telephone Ring Telphone 1

126 Helicopter Helicptr 1

127 Applause Applause 1

128 Gunshot Gunshot 1

: Same as Bank 0 : No sound E: Element number

XG Voice List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

111

Appendix

Instrument

Group

Pgm#

Bank 0

Bank Select LSB=00

Bank 0 E Bank 72 E Bank 96 E Bank 97 E Bank 98 E Bank 99 E Bank 100 E Bank 101 E

Piano 1 Acoustic Grand Piano GrandPno 2

2 Bright Acoustic Piano BritePno 2

3 Electric Grand Piano El.Grand 2

4 Honky-tonk Piano HnkyTonk 2

5 Electric Piano 1 E.Piano1 2

6 Electric Piano 2 E.Piano2 2

7 Harpsichord Harpsi. 1

8 Clavi Clavi. 2

Chromatic 9 Celesta Celesta 1

Percussion 10 Glockenspiel Glocken 1

11 Music Box MusicBox 2

12 Vibraphone Vibes 1

13 Marimba Marimba 1 Balimba 2 Log Drum 2

14 Xylophone Xylophon 1

15 Tubular Bells TubulBel 1 ChrchBel 2 Carillon 2

16 Dulcimer Dulcimer 1 Cimbalom 2 Santur 2

Organ 17 Drawbar Organ 1 DrawOrgn 1

18 Percussive Organ PercOrgn 1

19 Rock Organ RockOrgn 2

20 Church Organ 1 ChrchOrg 2

21 Reed Organ ReedOrgn 1

22 Accordion Acordion 2

23 Hamonica Harmnica 1

24 Tango Accordion TangoAcd 2

Guitar 25 Acoustic Guitar (nylon) 1 NylonGtr 1 Ukulele 1

26 Acoustic Guitar (steel) SteelGtr 1 Mandolin 2

27 Electric Guitar (jazz) Jazz Gtr 1

28 Electric Guitar (clean) CleanGtr 1

29 Electric Guitar (muted) Mute.Gtr 1

30 Overdriven Guitar Ovrdrive 1

31 Distortion Guitar Dist.Gtr 1

32 Guitar Harmonics GtrHarmo 1

Bass 33 Acoustic Bass Aco.Bass 1

34 Electric Bass (ﬁnger) FngrBass 1

35 Electric Bass (pick) PickBass 1

36 Fretless Bass Fretless 1 SynFretl 2 SmthFrtl 2

37 Slap Bass 1 SlapBas1 1

38 Slap Bass 2 SlapBas2 1

39 Synth Bass 1 SynBass1 1 Hammer 2

40 Synth Bass 2 SynBass2 2

Strings 41 Violin Violin 1

42 Viola Viola 1

43 Cello Cello 1

44 Contrabass Contrabs 1

45 Tremolo Strings Trem.Str 1

46 Pizzicato Strings Pizz.Str 1

47 Orchestral Harp Harp 1

48 Timpani Timpani 1

Ensemble 49 String Ensemble 1 Strings1 1

50 String Ensemble 2 Strings2 1

51 Synth Strings 1 Syn.Str1 2

52 Synth Strings 2 Syn.Str2 2

53 Choir Aahs ChoirAah 1

54 Voice Oohs VoiceOoh 1

55 Synth Voice SynVoice 1

56 Orchestra Hit Orch.Hit 2

Brass 57 Trumpet Trumpet 1

58 Trombone Trombone 1

59 Tuba Tuba 1

60 Muted Trumpet Mute.Trp 1

61 French Horn Fr. Horn 2

62 Brass Section 1 BrasSect 1

63 Synth Brass 1 SynBrss1 2

64 Synth Brass 2 SynBrss2 1

Reed 65 Soprano Sax SprnoSax 1

66 Alto Sax Alto Sax 1

67 Tenor Sax TenorSax 1

68 Baritone Sax Bari.Sax 1

69 Oboe Oboe 2

70 English Horn Eng.Horn 1

71 Bassoon Bassoon 1

72 Clarinet Clarinet 1

Pipe 73 Piccolo Piccolo 1

74 Flute Flute 1

75 Recorder Recorder 1

76 Pan Flute PanFlute 1

77 Blown Bottle Bottle 2

78 Shakuhachi Shakhchi 2

79 Whistle Whistle 1

80 Ocarina Ocarina 1

Synth Lead 81 Lead 1 (square) SquareLd 2

82 Lead 2 (sawtooth) Saw Ld 2 Seq Ana. 2

83 Lead 3 (calliope) CaliopLd 2

84 Lead 4 (chiff) Chiff Ld 2

85 Lead 5 (charang) CharanLd 2

86 Lead 6 (voice) Voice Ld 2

87 Lead 7 (ﬁfths) Fifth Ld 2

88 Lead 8 (bass+lead) Bass&Ld 2

Synth Pad 89 Pad 1 (new age) NewAgePd 2

90 Pad 2 (warm) Warm Pad 2

91 Pad 3 (polysynth) PolySyPd 2

92 Pad 4 (choir) ChoirPad 2

93 Pad 5 (bowed) BowedPad 2

94 Pad 6 (metallic) MetalPad 2

95 Pad 7 (halo) Halo Pad 2

96 Pad 8 (sweep) SweepPad 2

Synth Effects 97 FX 1 (rain) Rain 2

98 FX 2 (soundtrack) SoundTrk 2

99 FX 3 (crystal) Crystal 2 Gamelmba 2

100 FX 4 (atmosphere) Atmosphr 2

101 FX 5 (brightness) Bright 2 Smokey 2

102 FX 6 (goblins) Goblins 2 BelChoir 2

103 FX 7 (echoes) Echoes 2

104 FX 8 (sci-ﬁ) Sci-Fi 2

Ethnic 105 Sitar Sitar 1 Tambra 2 Tamboura 2

106 Banjo Banjo 1 Rabab 2 Gopichnt 2 Oud 2

107 Shamisen Shamisen 1

108 Koto Koto 1 Taisho-k 2 Kanoon 2

109 Kalimba Kalimba 1

110 Bagpipe Bagpipe 2

111 Fiddle Fiddle 1

112 Shanai Shanai 1 Pungi 1 Hichriki 2

Percussive 113 Tinkle Bell TnklBell 2 Bonang 2 Altair 2 Gamelan 2 S.Gamlan 2 Rama Cym 2 AsianBel 2

114 Agogo Agogo 2

115 Steel Drums SteelDrm 2 GlasPerc 2 ThaiBell 2

116 Woodblock Woodblok 1 Castanet 1

117 Taiko Drum TaikoDrm 1 Gr.Cassa 1

118 Melodic Tom 1 MelodTom 2

119 Synth Drum Syn Drum 1

120 Reverse Cymbal RevCymbl 1

Sound Effects 121 Guitar Fret Noise FretNoiz 2

122 Breath Noise BrthNoiz 2

123 Seashore Seashore 2

124 Bird Tweet Tweet 2

125 Telephone Ring Telphone 1

126 Helicopter Helicptr 1

127 Applause Applause 1

128 Gunshot Gunshot 1

Bank Select MSB=64

SFX

Pgm# Bank 0 E

1 CuttngNz 1

2 CttngNz2 2

4 Str Slap 1

17 Fl.KClik 1

33 Shower 1

34 Thunder 1

35 Wind 1

36 Stream 2

37 Bubble 2

38 Feed 2

49 Dog 1

50 Horse 1

51 Tweet 2 1

55 Ghost 2

56 Maou 2

65 PhonCall 1

66 DoorSqek 1

67 Door Slam 1

68 ScratchC 1

69 ScratchS 2

70 WindChim 1

71 Telphon2 1

81 CarEIgnt 1

82 CarTSqel 1

83 Car Pass 1

84 CarCrash 1

85 Siren 2

86 Train 1

87 JetPlane 2

88 Starship 2

89 Burst 2

90 Coaster 2

91 Submarin 2

97 Laugh 1

98 Scream 1

99 Punch 1

100 Heart 1

101 Footstep 1

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113 MchinGun 1

114 LaserGun 2

115 Xplosion 2

116 Firework 2

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

CP300 Owner’s Manual

112

Appendix

XG Drum Kit List

• Key-off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

• Alternate Group: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will immediately stop the sound of any other

instrument in the same group of the same number

Bank Select MSB (0-127)

127 127 127 127 127 127 127

Bank Select LSB (0-127)

00000 0 0

Program Change (1-128)

12917252628

MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit1 Standard Kit2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Dance Kit

Note# Note

13 C#-1 3 Surdo Mute

14 D-1 3 Surdo Open

15 D#-1 Hi Q

16 E-1 Whip Slap

17 F-1 4 Scratch H

18 F#-1 4 Scratch L

19 G-1 Finger Snap

20 G#-1 Click Noise

21 A-1 Metronome Click

22 A#-1 Metronome Bell

23 B-1 Seq Click L

24 C0 Seq Click H

25 C#0 Brush Tap

26 D0 O Brush Swirl

27 D#0 Brush Slap

28 E0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

29 F0 O Snare Roll

30 F#0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

31 G0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Noisy Snare Snappy Electro Snare Noisy 4 Snare Techno

32 G#0 Sticks

33 A0 Kick Soft Kick 3 Kick 3 Kick Techno Q

34 A#0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot H Short Rim Gate

35 B0 Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate Kick Analog Short Kick Techno L

36 C1 Kick Kick Short Kick Gate Kick Gate Heavy Kick Analog Kick Techno

37 C#1 Side Stick Side Stick Light Side Stick Analog Side Stick Analog

38 D1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock Snare Noisy 2 Snare Analog Snare Clap

39 D#1 Hand Clap

40 E1 Snare Tight Snare Tight H Snare Tight Snappy Snare Rock Tight Snare Noisy 3 Snare Analog 2 Snare Dry

41 F1 Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 Tom Electro 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Analog 1

42 F#1 1 Hi-Hat Closed Hi-Hat Closed Analog Hi-Hat Closed 3

43 G1 Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 Tom Electro 2 Tom Analog 2 Tom Analog 2

44 G#1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Closed Analog 2 Hi-Hat Closed Analog 3

45 A1 Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 Tom Electro 3 Tom Analog 3 Tom Analog 3

46 A#1 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Analog Hi-Hat Open 3

47 B1 Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 Tom Electro 4 Tom Analog 4 Tom Analog 4

48 C2 Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 Tom Electro 5 Tom Analog 5 Tom Analog 5

49 C#2 Crash Cymbal 1 Crash Analog Crash Analog

50 D2 High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 Tom Electro 6 Tom Analog 6 Tom Analog 6

51 D#2 Ride Cymbal 1

52 E2 Chinese Cymbal

53 F2 Ride Cymbal Cup

54 F#2 Tambourine

55 G2 Splash Cymbal

56 G#2 Cowbell Cowbell Analog Cowbell Analog

57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2

58 A#2 Vibraslap

59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2

60 C3 Bongo H

61 C#3 Bongo L

62 D3 Conga H Mute Conga Analog H Conga Analog H

63 D#3 Conga H Open Conga Analog M Conga Analog M

64 E3 Conga L Conga Analog L Conga Analog L

65 F3 Timbale H

66 F#3 Timbale L

67 G3 Agogo H

68 G#3 Agogo L

69 A3 Cabasa

70 A#3 Maracas Maracas 2 Maracas 2

71 B3 O Samba Whistle H

72 C4 O Samba Whistle L

73 C#4 Guiro Short

74 D4 O Guiro Long

75 D#4 Claves Claves 2 Claves 2

76 E4 Wood Block H

77 F4 Wood Block L

78 F#4 Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

79 G4 Cuica Open

Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2 Scratch L 2

80 G#4 2 Triangle Mute

81 A4 2 Triangle Open

82 A#4 Shaker

83 B4 Jingle Bells

84 C5 Bell Tree

85 C#5

86 D5

87 D#5

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5

91 G5

Same as Standard Kit 1

No Sound

XG Drum Kit List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

113

Appendix

Bank Select MSB (0-127)

127 127 127 126 126

Bank Select LSB (0-127)

00000

Program Change (1-128)

33 41 49 1 2

MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit1 SFX Kit2

Note# Note

13 C#-1 3

14 D-1 3

15 D#-1

16 E-1

17 F-1 4

18 F#-1 4

19 G-1

20 G#-1

21 A-1

22 A#-1

23 B-1

24 C0

25 C#0

26 D0 O

27 D#0

28 E0 O

29 F0 O

30 F#0

31 G0 Snare Jazz H Brush Slap 2

32 G#0

33 A0 Kick Soft 2

34 A#0 Open Rim Shot Light

35 B0 Gran Cassa

36 C1 Kick Jazz Kick Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call

37 C#1 Side Stick Light Side Stick Light Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak

38 D1 Snare Jazz L Brush Slap 3 Band Snare Door Slam

39 D#1 String Slap Scratch Cut

40 E1 Snare Jazz M Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Scratch H 3

41 F1 Tom Brush 1 Wind Chime

42 F#1 1 Telephone Ring 2

43 G1 Tom Brush 2

44 G#1 1

45 A1 Tom Brush 3

46 A#1 1

47 B1 Tom Brush 4

48 C2 Tom Brush 5

49 C#2 Hand Cymbal

50 D2 Tom Brush 6

51 D#2 Hand Cymbal Short

52 E2 Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition

53 F2 Car Tires Squeal

54 F#2 Car Passing

55 G2 Car Crash

56 G#2 Siren

57 A2 Hand Cymbal 2 Train

58 A#2 Jet Plane

59 B2 Hand Cymbal 2 Short Starship

60 C3 Burst

61 C#3 Roller Coaster

62 D3 Submarine

63 D#3

64 E3

65 F3

66 F#3

67 G3

68 G#3 Shower Laugh

69 A3 Thunder Scream

70 A#3 Wind Punch

71 B3 O Stream Heart Beat

72 C4 O

Bubble Foot Steps

73 C#4

Feed

74 D4 O

75 D#4

76 E4

77 F4

78 F#4

79 G4

80 G#4 2

81 A4 2

82 A#4

83 B4

84 C5 Dog Machine Gun

85 C#5

Horse Laser Gun

86 D5

Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

87 D#5 Firework

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5 Ghost

91 G5 Maou

CP300 Owner’s Manual

114

Appendix

Effect Type List

■ Reverb

Reverb types that can be selected by

panel operation

All reverb types

■ Chorus

Chorus types that can be selected by

panel operation

All chorus types

■ Variation/Insertion

Variation/insertion types that can be

selected by panel operation

All variation/insertion effects

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name Display

217Room 4 Room

119Hall 4 Hall 1

117Hall 3 Hall 2

317Stage 3 Stage

416Plate 2 Plate

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name

00No Effect

10Hall 1

11Hall 2

16Hall M

17Hall L

117Hall 3

119Hall 4

20Room 1

21Room 2

22Room 3

25Room S

26Room M

27Room L

217Room 4

30Stage 1

31Stage 2

317Stage 3

318Sound Board

40Plate 1

47GM Plate

416Plate 2

16 0 White Room

17 0 Tunnel

18 0 Canyon

19 0 Basement

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name Display

65 8 Chorus 4 Chorus

66 8 Celeste 4 Celeste

67 1 Flanger 2 Flanger

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name

00No Effect

65 0 Chorus 1

65 1 Chorus 2

65 2 Chorus 3

65 3 GM Chorus 1

65 4 GM Chorus 2

65 5 GM Chorus 3

65 6 GM Chorus 4

65 7 FB Chorus

65 8 Chorus 4

66 0 Celeste 1

66 1 Celeste 2

66 2 Celeste 3

66 8 Celeste 4

66 18 Rotary Speaker 1

67 0 Flanger 1

67 1 Flanger 2

67 7 GM Flanger

67 8 Flanger 3

68 0 Symphonic 1

68 16 Symphonic 2

72 0 Phaser 1

72 8 Phaser 2

72 20 Phaser 3

87 0 Ens Detune

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name Display

516DelayL,C,R 2 Delay L,C,R

60Delay L,R Delay L,R

70Echo Echo

80Cross Delay Cross Delay

68 16 Symphonic 2 Symphonic

66 18

RotarySpeaker1

Rotary Speaker

70 22 Tremolo 3 Tremolo

119 0 VibeRotor VibeRotor

71 27 Auto Pan 3 Auto Pan

72 20 Phaser 3 Phaser

78 21 Auto Wah 2 Auto Wah

318Sound Board Sound Board

75 26 AmpSimulator2 Amp Simulator

83 16 Compressor 2 Compressor

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name

00No Effect

10Hall 1

11Hall 2

16Hall M

17Hall L

20Room 1

21Room 2

22Room 3

25Room S

26Room M

27Room L

30Stage 1

31Stage 2

318Sound Board

40Plate

47GM Plate

50Delay L,C,R 1

516Delay L,C,R 2

60Delay L,R

70Echo

80Cross Delay

90ER1

91ER2

10 0 Gate Reverb

11 0 Reverse Gate

16 0 White Room

17 0 Tunnel

18 0 Canyon

19 0 Basement

20 0 Karaoke 1

20 1 Karaoke 2

20 2 Karaoke 3

21 0 Tempo Delay

21 8 Tempo Echo

22 0 Tempo Cross

64 0 Thru

65 0 Chorus1

65 1 Chorus2

65 2 Chorus3

65 3 GM Chorus 1

65 4 GM Chorus 2

65 5 GM Chorus 3

65 6 GM Chorus 4

65 7 FB Chorus

65 8 Chorus 4

66 0 Celeste 1

66 1 Celeste 2

66 2 Celeste 3

66 8 Celeste 4

66 18 Rotary Speaker 1

67 0 Flanger 1

67 1 Flanger 2

67 7 GM Flanger

67 8 Flanger 3

68 0 Symphonic 1

68 16 Symphonic 2

69 0 Rotary Speaker 2

69 1 Dist + Rot Sp

69 2 OD + Rot Sp

69 3 Amp Sin + Rot Sp

70 0 Tremolo 1

70 19 Tremolo 2

70 22 Tremolo 3

71 0 AutoPan 1

71 26 AutoPan 2

71 27 AutoPan 3

72 0 Phaser 1

72 8 Phaser 2

72 20 Phaser 3

73 0 Distortion

73 1 Comp Dist

73 8 Stereo Dist

74 0 Over Drive

74 8 Stereo OD

75 0 Amp Simulator 1

75 8 Stereo Amp Sim

75 26 Amp Simulator 2

76 0 3 Band EQ

77 0 2 Band EQ

78 0 Auto Wah 1

78 1 Auto Wah + Dist

78 2 Auto Wah + OD

78 21 Auto Wah 2

80 0 Pitch Change 1

80 1 Pitch Change 2

81 0 Hrm ENH

82 0 Touch Wah 1

82 1 Touch Wah + Dist

82 2 Touch Wah + OD

82 8 Touch Wah 2

83 0 Compressor 1

83 16 Compressor 2

84 0 Noise Gate

85 0 Voice Cancel

86 0 2 Way Rot Sp

86 1 Dist + 2 Rot Sp

86 2 OD + 2 Rot Sp

86 3 Amp Sim + 2 Rot Sp

87 0 Ens Detune

88 0 Ambience

93 0 Talk Mod

94 0 Lo-Fi

95 0 Dist + Delay

95 1 OD + Delay

96 0 Cmp + Dist + Dly

96 1 Cmp + OD + Dly

97 0 Wah + Dist + Dly

97 1 Wah + OD + Dly

98 0 V Dist Hard

98 1 V Dist H + Dly

98 2 V Dist Soft

98 3 V Dist S + Dly

99 0 Dual Rot Sp 1

99 1 Dual Rot Sp 2

100 0 Dist + Tmp Delay

100 1 OD + Tmp Delay

101 0 Cmp + Dist + TDly

101 1 Cmp + OD + TDly

102 0 Wah + Dist + TDly

102 1 Wah + OD + TDly

103 0 V Dist H + TDly

103 1 V Dist S + TDly

119 0 Vibe Rotor

Type MSB Type LSB Effect Name

CP300 Owner’s Manual

115

Appendix

Effect Parameter List

Items with a dot indicator (●) in the Control column are parameters that can be controlled via assignable controllers.

Note that this is applicable to the Variation effects (while Insertion is selected) and to the Insertion effects.

HALL 1, HALL 2, HALL M, HALL L

ROOM 1, ROOM 2, ROOM 3, ROOM S, ROOM M, ROOM L

STAGE 1, STAGE 2

PLATE (Reverb, Variation, Insertion block)

HALL 3

HALL 4

ROOM 4

STAGE 3

PLATE 2 (Reverb)

DELAY L, C, R 1

DELAY L, C, R 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

DELAY L, R (Variation, Insertion block)

ECHO (Variation, Insertion block)

CROSS DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

EARLY REF 1, EARLY REF 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3 – 30.0s 0 – 69 table #4

2 Diffusion 0 – 10 0 – 10

3 Initial Delay 0.1mS – 200.0mS (Rev)

0.1mS – 99.3mS (Var/Ins)

0 – 127

0 – 63

table #5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 (table #15) ●

11 Rev Delay 0.1mS – 200.0mS (Rev)

0.1mS – 99.3mS (Var/Ins)

0 – 127

0 – 63

table #5

12 Density 0 – 4 0 – 4

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1 – 127

14 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

15 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127 (table #16)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3 – 30.0s 0 – 69 table #4

2 Diffusion 0 – 10 0 – 10

3 Initial Delay 0.1mS – 99.3mS 0 – 63 table #5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 (table #15) ●

14 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

2 Rch Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

3 Cch Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

4 Feedback Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 Cch Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

7 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

2 Rch Delay 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay1 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

2 Lch Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Rch Delay1 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

4 Rch Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

5 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

6 Lch Delay2 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

7 Rch Delay2 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

8 Delay2 Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1L –>R Delay 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

2R –>L Delay 0.1 – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

3 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

4 Input Select L, R, L&R 0 – 2

5 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0 – 5

2 Room Size 0.1 – 7.0 0 – 44 table #6

3 Diffusion 0 – 10 0 – 10

4 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 200.0ms 0 – 127 table #5

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Liveness 0 – 10 0 – 10

12 Density 0 – 3 0 – 3

13 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

116

Appendix

GATE REVERB

REVERSE GATE (Variation, Insertion block)

WHITE ROOM

TUNNEL

CANYON

BASEMENT (Reverb, Variation, Insertion block)

KARAOKE 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)

TEMPO DELAY

TEMPO ECHO (Variation, Insertion block)

TEMPO CROSS (Variation, Insertion block)

CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4

CELESTE 1, 2, 3, 4

GM CHORUS 1, 2, 3, 4

FB CHORUS

ROTARY SPEAKER 1 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

FLANGER 1, 2, 3

GM FLANGER (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1Type Type A, Type B 0 – 1

2 Room Size 0.1 – 7.0 0 – 44 table #6

3 Diffusion 0 – 10 0 – 10

4 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 200.0ms 0 – 127 table #5

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Liveness 0 – 10 0 – 10

12 Density 0 – 3 0 – 3

13 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3 – 30.0s 0 – 69 table #4

2 Diffusion 0 – 10 0 – 10

3 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 99.3ms 0 – 63 table #5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

6Width 0.5 – 10.2m 0 – 37 table #11

7 Height 0.5 – 20.2m 0 – 73 table #11

8 Depth 0.5 – 30.2m 0 – 104 table #11

9Wall Vary 0 – 30 0 – 30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0.1ms – 99.3ms 0 – 63 table #5

12 Density 0 – 4 0 – 4

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1 – 127

14 High Damp 0.1 – 1.0 1 – 10

15 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0.1ms – 400.0ms 0 – 127 table #7

2 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

3 HPF Cutoff Thru – 8.0kHz 0 – 52 table #3

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Density 0 – 3 0 – 3

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

2 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Feedback High

Dump

0 – 1.0 0 – 10

4 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

5 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time L>R 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

2 Delay Time R>L 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

3 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

4 Input Select L, R, L&R 0 – 2

5 Feedback High

Dump

0 – 1.0 0 – 10

6 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

14 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 EQ High Frequency 500 – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

16 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

4 Delay Offset 0.0mS – 50mS 0 – 127 table #2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0 – 1

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

4 Delay Offset 0.0ms – 50ms 0 – 127 table #2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

14 LFO Phase

Difference

-180 – +180deg

(resolution=3deg.)

4 – 124

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

117

Appendix

SYMPHONIC 1, 2 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

ROTARY SPEAKER 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

DISTORTION+ROTARY SPEAKER

OVERDRIVE+ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)

AMP SIM.+ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)

TREMOLO 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)

AUTO PAN 1, 2, 3 (Variation, Insertion block)

PHASER 1, 3 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

PHASER 2 (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Delay Offset 0.0ms – 50ms 0 – 127 table #2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1 ●

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 ●

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500 – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

14 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

16 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 ●

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

14 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

16 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1 ●

2AM Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 PM Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

14 LFO Phase

Difference

-180 – +180deg

(resolution=3deg.)

4 – 124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0 – 1

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1 ●

2 L/R Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 F/R Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

4PAN Direction L <–> R, L –> R, L <– R,

Lturn, Rturn, L/R

0 – 5

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

11 EQ Mid Frequency

(variation block)

100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Width

(variation block)

1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Stage 4 – 22 (chorus, variation

block)

4 – 22

4 – 12 (insertion block) 4 – 12

12 Diffusion mono/stereo 0 – 1

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Stage 3 – 11 3 – 6

13 LFO Phase

Difference

-180deg – +180deg

(resolution=3deg.)

4 – 124

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

118

Appendix

DISTORTION

OVERDRIVE (Variation, Insertion block)

COMP+DIST (Variation, Insertion block)

STEREO DISTORTION

STEREO OVER DRIVE (Variation, Insertion block)

AMP SIMULATOR (Variation, Insertion block)

STEREO AMP SIMULATOR (Variation, Insertion block)

3BAND EQ (Variation, Insertion block)

2BAND EQ (Variation, Insertion block)

AUTO WAH 1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

3 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

5 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127 0 – 127 mild – sharp

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

3 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

5 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127 0 – 127 mild – sharp

12 Attack 1ms – 40ms 0 – 19 table #8

13 Release 10ms – 680ms 0 – 15 table #9

14 Threshold -48dB – -6dB 79 – 121

15 Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 0 – 7 table #10

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

3 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

4 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

5 Output Level 0 – 127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

9 EQ Mid Width 1 – 12 10 – 120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

2AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3

3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k – Thru 34 – 60 table #3

4 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127 0 – 127 mild – sharp

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

2AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo, Tube 0 – 3

3 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

4 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

3 EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

4 EQ Mid Width 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

5 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz – 2.0kHz 8 – 40 table #3

7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0 – 1

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

2 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

4 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Cutoff Frequency

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

Drive (variation block)

0 – 127 0 – 127

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

119

Appendix

AUTO WAH+DIST

AUTO WHA+ODRV (Variation, Insertion block)

PITCH CHANGE 1 (Variation, Insertion block)

PITCH CHANGE 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

HARMONIC ENHANCER (Variation, Insertion block)

TOUCH WAH 1

TOUCH WAH+DIST (Variation, Insertion block)

TOUCH WAH 2

TOUCH WAH+ODRV (Variation, Insertion block)

COMPRESSOR 1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

NOISE GATE (Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2 LFO Depth 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Cutoff Frequency

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

11 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

12 EQ Low Gain

(distortion)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Gain

(distortion)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz – thru 34 – 60 table #3

15 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24 – +24 40 – 88

2 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 400.0ms 0 – 127 table #7

3 Fine 1 -50 – +50 14 – 114

4 Fine 2 -50 – +50 14 – 114

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63 – R63 1 – 127

12 Output Level 1 0 – 127 0 – 127

13 Pan 2 L63 – R63 1 – 127

14 Output Level 2 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24 – +24 40 – 88

2 Initial Delay 0.1ms – 400.0ms 0 – 127 table #7

3 Fine 1 -50 – +50cent 14 – 114

4 Fine 2 -50 – +50cent 14 – 114

5 Feedback Level -63 – +63 1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63 – R63 1 – 127

12 Output Level 1 0 – 127 0 – 127

13 Pan 2 L63 – R63 1 – 127

14 Output Level 2 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 HPF Cutoff 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

2 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

3Mix Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0 – 127 0 – 127

2 Cutoff Frequency

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

Drive (variation block)

0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0 – 127 0 – 127

2 Cutoff Frequency

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

Drive (variation block)

0 – 127 0 – 127

12 EQ Low Gain

(variation block)

(distortion)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ Mid Gain

(variation block)

(distortion)

-12 – +12dB 52 – 76

14 LPF Cutoff (variation

block)

1.0kHz – thru 34 – 60 table #3

15 Output Level

(variation block)

0 – 127 0 – 127

16 Release (variation

block)

10 – 680ms 52 – 67 table #12

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1 – 40ms 0 – 19 table #8

2 Release 10 – 680ms 0 – 15 table #9

3 Threshold -48 – -6dB 79 – 121

4 Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 0 – 7 table #10

5 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1 – 40ms 0 – 19 table #8

2 Release 10 – 680ms 0 – 15 table #9

3 Threshold -72 – -30dB 55 – 97

4 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

120

Appendix

VOICE CANCEL (Variation, Insertion block)

2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)

DIST+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER

OD+2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (Variation, Insertion block)

AMP SIM.+2WAY ROTARY SP (Variation, Insertion block)

ENSEMBLE DETUNE (Chorus, Variation, Insertion block)

AMBIENCE (Variation, Insertion block)

TALKING MODULATION (Variation, Insertion block)

LO-FI (Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

11 Low Adjust 0 – 26 0 – 26

12 High Adjust 0 – 26 0 – 26

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1 ●

2 Drive Low 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Drive High 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Low/High L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54 table #3

12 Mic L – R Angle 0deg – 180deg

(resolution=3deg.)

0 – 60

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed 0.0 – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 ●

2 Drive Low 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Drive High 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Low/High Balance L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32 – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54

12 Mic L – R Angle 0 – 180deg 0 – 60

14 Drive 0 – 127

15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

16 Output Level 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed 0.0 – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 ●

2 Drive Low 0 – 127 0 – 127

3 Drive High 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Low/High Balance L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz – 10.0kHz 14 – 54

12 Mic L – R Angle 0 – 180deg 0 – 60

13 AMP Type Off, Stack, Combo,

Tube (AMPSIM only)

0 – 3

14 Drive 0 – 127

15 LPF Cuttoff 1kHz – Thru 34 – 60

16 Output Level 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Detune -50 – +50cent 14 – 114

2 Lch Init Delay 0.0mS – 50mS 0 – 127 table #2

3 Rch Init Delay 0.0mS – 50mS 0 – 127 table #2

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

12 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

14 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0.0mS – 50mS 0 – 127 table #2

2 Output Phase normal/inverse 0 – 1

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1Vowel a, i, u, e, o 0 – 4 ●

2 Move speed 1 – 62 1 – 62

3 Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Sampling Freq

Control

44.1kHz – 345Hz 0 – 127 table #13

2Word Length 1 – 127 1 – 127

3 Output Gain -6 – +12dB 0 – 18

4 LPF Cutoff 63Hz – Thru 10 – 60 table #3

5 Filter Type Thru, PowerBass, Radio,

Tel, Clean, Low

0 – 5

6 LPF Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

7 Bit Assign 0 – 6 0 – 6

8 Emphasis Off/On 0 – 1

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

15 Input Mode mono/stereo

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

121

Appendix

DIST+DELAY

OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

COMP+DIST+DELAY

COMP+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

WAH+DIST+DELAY

WAH+OVERDRIVE+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

V DISTORTION HARD

V DISTORTION SOFT (Variation, Insertion block)

V DISTORTION HARD+DELAY

V DISTORTION SOFT+DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

DUAL ROTOR SPEAKER1, 2 (Variation, Insertion block)

DIST+TEMPO DELAY

OVERDRIVE+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

COMP+DIST+TEMPO DELAY

COMP+OD+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay Time 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

2 Rch Delay Time 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

3 Delay Feedback

Time

0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

4 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

5 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

7 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

8 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

9 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

2 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Comp. Attack 1ms – 40ms 0 – 19 table #8

12 Comp. Release 10ms – 680ms 0 – 15 table #9

13 Comp. Threshold -48dB – -6dB 79 – 121

14 Comp. Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 0 – 7 table #10

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0.1 – 1638.3ms 1 – 16383

2 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

7 Dist EQ Mid Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Wah Sensitive 0 – 127 0 – 127

12 Wah Cutoff Freq

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127

13 Wah Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

14 Wah Release 10 – 680ms 52 – 67 table #12

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Overdrive 0 – 100% 0 – 100

2 Device Transistor/Vintage Tube/

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz

0 – 4

3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/

Radio/Megaphone

0 – 5

4Presence 0 – 20 0 – 20

5 Output Level 0 – 100% 0 – 100

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Overdrive 0 – 100% 0 – 100

2 Device Transistor/Vintage Tube/

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz

0 – 4

3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/

Radio/Megaphone

0 – 5

4Presence 0 – 20 0 – 20

5 Output Level 0 – 100% 0 – 100

6 Delay Time L 0.1ms – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

7 Delay Time R 0.1ms – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

8 Delay Feedback

Time

0.1ms – 1486.0ms 1 – 14860

9 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed Slow 0.0 – 2.65Hz 0 – 63 table #1

2 Horn Speed Slow 0.0 – 2.65Hz 0 – 63 table #1

3 Rotor Speed Fast 2.69 – 39.7Hz 64 – 127 table #1

4 Horn Speed Fast 2.69 – 39.7Hz 64 – 127 table #1

5 Slow-Fast Time of R 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Slow-Fast Time of H 0 – 127 0 – 127

7 Drive Low 0 – 127 0 – 127

8 Drive High 0 – 127 0 – 127

9 Low/High Balance L63>H – L=H – L<H=63 1 – 127

11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

12 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

14 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

15 Mic L-R Angle 0 – 180deg 0 – 60

16 Speed Control Slow/Fast 0/1 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

2 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

9 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

2 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

9 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Comp. Attack 1ms – 40ms 0 – 19

12 Comp. Release 10ms – 680ms 0 – 15

13 Comp. Threshold -48dB – -6dB 79 – 121

14 Comp. Ratio 1.0 – 20.0 0 – 7

Effect Parameter List

CP300 Owner’s Manual

122

Appendix

WAH+DIST+TEMPO DELAY

WAH+OD+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

V DIST HARD+TEMPO DELAY

V DIST SOFT+TEMPO DELAY (Variation, Insertion block)

VIBE ROTOR (Variation, Insertion block)

NO EFFECT (Reverb, Chorus, Variation)

THRU (Insertion block)

* Parameter 10 Dry/Wet only affects insertion type effects.

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

2 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

3 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

4 Dist Drive 0 – 127 0 – 127

5 Dist Output Level 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 Dist EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

7 Dist EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

9 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Wah Sensitive 0 – 127 0 – 127

12 Wah Cutoff Freq

Offset

0 – 127 0 – 127

13 Wah Resonance 1.0 – 12.0 10 – 120

14 Wah Release 10 – 680mS 52 – 67

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1 Overdrive 0 – 100% 0 – 100

2 Device Transistor/Vintage Tube/

Dist1/Dist2/Fuzz

0 – 4

3 Speaker Flat/Stack/Combo/Twin/

Radio/Megaphone

0 – 5

4Presence 0 – 20 0 – 20

5 Output Level 0 – 100% 0 – 100

6 Delay Time 64th/3 – 4thx6 0 – 19 table #14

7 Delay Feedback

Level

-63 – +63 1 – 127

8 L/R Diffusion 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127 (63ms)

1 – 127

9 Lag 1 (-63ms) – 64 (0ms) –

127(63ms)

1 – 127

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127 ●

11 Delay Mix 0 – 127 0 – 127

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

1Vibrate Speed 0.00Hz – 39.7Hz 0 – 127 table #1

2Vibrate Depth (AM) 0 – 127 0 – 127

3Vibrate Depth (PM) 0 – 127 0 – 127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz – 2.0kHz 4 – 40 table #3

7 EQ Low Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz – 16.0kHz 28 – 58 table #3

9 EQ High Gain -12 – +12dB 52 – 76

10 Dry/Wet Balance D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1 – 127

14 LFO Phase

Difference

-180 – +180deg

(resolution=3deg.)

4 – 124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0 – 1

16 Vibrate SW OFF, ON 0 – 1 ●

No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control

CP300 Owner’s Manual

123

Appendix

Effect Data Assign Table

Table #1

LFO Frequency

Table #2

Modulation Delay Offset

Table #3

EQ Frequency

Table #4

Reverb Time

Table #5

Delay Time (200.0ms)

Data Value Data Value

0 0.00 64 2.69

1 0.04 65 2.78

2 0.08 66 2.86

3 0.13 67 2.94

4 0.17 68 3.03

5 0.21 69 3.11

6 0.25 70 3.20

7 0.29 71 3.28

8 0.34 72 3.37

9 0.38 73 3.45

10 0.42 74 3.53

11 0.46 75 3.62

12 0.51 76 3.70

13 0.55 77 3.87

14 0.59 78 4.04

15 0.63 79 4.21

16 0.67 80 4.37

17 0.72 81 4.54

18 0.76 82 4.71

19 0.80 83 4.88

20 0.84 84 5.05

21 0.88 85 5.22

22 0.93 86 5.38

23 0.97 87 5.55

24 1.01 88 5.72

25 1.05 89 6.06

26 1.09 90 6.39

27 1.14 91 6.73

28 1.18 92 7.07

29 1.22 93 7.40

30 1.26 94 7.74

31 1.30 95 8.08

32 1.35 96 8.41

33 1.39 97 8.75

34 1.43 98 9.08

35 1.47 99 9.42

36 1.51 100 9.76

37 1.56 101 10.1

38 1.60 102 10.8

39 1.64 103 11.4

40 1.68 104 12.1

41 1.72 105 12.8

42 1.77 106 13.5

43 1.81 107 14.1

44 1.85 108 14.8

45 1.89 109 15.5

46 1.94 110 16.2

47 1.98 111 16.8

48 2.02 112 17.5

49 2.06 113 18.2

50 2.10 114 19.5

51 2.15 115 20.9

52 2.19 116 22.2

53 2.23 117 23.6

54 2.27 118 24.9

55 2.31 119 26.2

56 2.36 120 27.6

57 2.40 121 28.9

58 2.44 122 30.3

59 2.48 123 31.6

60 2.52 124 33.0

61 2.57 125 34.3

62 2.61 126 37.0

63 2.65 127 39.7

Data Value Data Value

0 0.0 64 6.4

1 0.1 65 6.5

2 0.2 66 6.6

3 0.3 67 6.7

4 0.4 68 6.8

5 0.5 69 6.9

6 0.6 70 7.0

7 0.7 71 7.1

8 0.8 72 7.2

9 0.9 73 7.3

10 1.0 74 7.4

11 1.1 75 7.5

12 1.2 76 7.6

13 1.3 77 7.7

14 1.4 78 7.8

15 1.5 79 7.9

16 1.6 80 8.0

17 1.7 81 8.1

18 1.8 82 8.2

19 1.9 83 8.3

20 2.0 84 8.4

21 2.1 85 8.5

22 2.2 86 8.6

23 2.3 87 8.7

24 2.4 88 8.8

25 2.5 89 8.9

26 2.6 90 9.0

27 2.7 91 9.1

28 2.8 92 9.2

29 2.9 93 9.3

30 3.0 94 9.4

31 3.1 95 9.5

32 3.2 96 9.6

33 3.3 97 9.7

34 3.4 98 9.8

35 3.5 99 9.9

36 3.6 100 10.0

37 3.7 101 11.1

38 3.8 102 12.2

39 3.9 103 13.3

40 4.0 104 14.4

41 4.1 105 15.5

42 4.2 106 17.1

43 4.3 107 18.6

44 4.4 108 20.2

45 4.5 109 21.8

46 4.6 110 23.3

47 4.7 111 24.9

48 4.8 112 26.5

49 4.9 113 28.0

50 5.0 114 29.6

51 5.1 115 31.2

52 5.2 116 32.8

53 5.3 117 34.3

54 5.4 118 35.9

55 5.5 119 37.5

56 5.6 120 39.0

57 5.7 121 40.6

58 5.8 122 42.2

59 5.9 123 43.7

60 6.0 124 45.3

61 6.1 125 46.9

62 6.2 126 48.4

63 6.3 127 50.0

Data Value

0 THRU (0)

122

225

328

432

536

640

745

850

956

10 63

11 70

12 80

13 90

14 100

15 110

16 125

17 140

18 160

19 180

20 200

21 225

22 250

23 280

24 315

25 355

26 400

27 450

28 500

29 560

30 630

31 700

32 800

33 900

34 1.0k

35 1.1k

36 1.2k

37 1.4k

38 1.6k

39 1.8k

40 2.0k

41 2.2k

42 2.5k

43 2.8k

44 3.2k

45 3.6k

46 4.0k

47 4.5k

48 5.0k

49 5.6k

50 6.3k

51 7.0k

52 8.0k

53 9.0k

54 10.0k

55 11.0k

56 12.0k

57 14.0k

58 16.0k

59 18.0k

60 THRU (20.0k)

Data Value Data Value

0 0.3 64 17.0

1 0.4 65 18.0

2 0.5 66 19.0

3 0.6 67 20.0

4 0.7 68 25.0

5 0.8 69 30.0

6 0.9

7 1.0

8 1.1

9 1.2

10 1.3

11 1.4

12 1.5

13 1.6

14 1.7

15 1.8

16 1.9

17 2.0

18 2.1

19 2.2

20 2.3

21 2.4

22 2.5

23 2.6

24 2.7

25 2.8

26 2.9

27 3.0

28 3.1

29 3.2

30 3.3

31 3.4

32 3.5

33 3.6

34 3.7

35 3.8

36 3.9

37 4.0

38 4.1

39 4.2

40 4.3

41 4.4

42 4.5

43 4.6

44 4.7

45 4.8

46 4.9

47 5.0

48 5.5

49 6.0

50 6.5

51 7.0

52 7.5

53 8.0

54 8.5

55 9.0

56 9.5

57 10.0

58 11.0

59 12.0

60 13.0

61 14.0

62 15.0

63 16.0

Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 64 100.8

1 1.7 65 102.4

2 3.2 66 104.0

3 4.8 67 105.6

4 6.4 68 107.1

5 8.0 69 108.7

6 9.5 70 110.3

7 11.1 71 111.9

8 12.7 72 113.4

9 14.3 73 115.0

10 15.8 74 116.6

11 17.4 75 118.2

12 19.0 76 119.7

13 20.6 77 121.3

14 22.1 78 122.9

15 23.7 79 124.4

16 25.3 80 126.0

17 26.9 81 127.6

18 28.4 82 129.2

19 30.0 83 130.7

20 31.6 84 132.3

21 33.2 85 133.9

22 34.7 86 135.5

23 36.3 87 137.0

24 37.9 88 138.6

25 39.5 89 140.2

26 41.0 90 141.8

27 42.6 91 143.3

28 44.2 92 144.9

29 45.7 93 146.5

30 47.3 94 148.1

31 48.9 95 149.6

32 50.5 96 151.2

33 52.0 97 152.8

34 53.6 98 154.4

35 55.2 99 155.9

36 56.8 100 157.5

37 58.3 101 159.1

38 59.9 102 160.6

39 61.5 103 162.2

40 63.1 104 163.8

41 64.6 105 165.4

42 66.2 106 166.9

43 67.8 107 168.5

44 69.4 108 170.1

45 70.9 109 171.7

46 72.5 110 173.2

47 74.1 111 174.8

48 75.7 112 176.4

49 77.2 113 178.0

50 78.8 114 179.5

51 80.4 115 181.1

52 81.9 116 182.7

53 83.5 117 184.3

54 85.1 118 185.8

55 86.7 119 187.4

56 88.2 120 189.0

57 89.8 121 190.6

58 91.4 122 192.1

59 93.0 123 193.7

60 94.5 124 195.3

61 96.1 125 196.9

62 97.7 126 198.4

63 99.3 127 200.0

Effect Data Assign Table

CP300 Owner’s Manual

124

Appendix

Table #6

Room Size

Table #7

Delay Time (400.0ms)

Table #8

Compressor Attack Time

Table #9

Compressor Release Time

Table #10

Compressor Ratio

Table #11

Reverb Width; Depth; Height

Table #12

Wah Release Time

Table #13

Sampling Freq Control

Table #14

Tempo Delay

Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 64 10.1

1 0.3 65 10.3

2 0.4 66 10.4

3 0.6 67 10.6

4 0.7 68 10.8

5 0.9 69 10.9

6 1.0 70 11.1

7 1.2 71 11.2

8 1.4 72 11.4

9 1.5 73 11.5

10 1.7 74 11.7

11 1.8 75 11.9

12 2.0 76 12.0

13 2.1 77 12.2

14 2.3 78 12.3

15 2.5 79 12.5

16 2.6 80 12.6

17 2.8 81 12.8

18 2.9 82 12.9

19 3.1 83 13.1

20 3.2 84 13.3

21 3.4 85 13.4

22 3.5 86 13.6

23 3.7 87 13.7

24 3.9 88 13.9

25 4.0 89 14.0

26 4.2 90 14.2

27 4.3 91 14.4

28 4.5 92 14.5

29 4.6 93 14.7

30 4.8 94 14.8

31 5.0 95 15.0

32 5.1 96 15.1

33 5.3 97 15.3

34 5.4 98 15.5

35 5.6 99 15.6

36 5.7 100 15.8

37 5.9 101 15.9

38 6.1 102 16.1

39 6.2 103 16.2

40 6.4 104 16.4

41 6.5 105 16.6

42 6.7 106 16.7

43 6.8 107 16.9

44 7.0 108 17.0

45 7.2 109 17.2

46 7.3 110 17.3

47 7.5 111 17.5

48 7.6 112 17.6

49 7.8 113 17.8

50 7.9 114 18.0

51 8.1 115 18.1

52 8.2 116 18.3

53 8.4 117 18.4

54 8.6 118 18.6

55 8.7 119 18.7

56 8.9 120 18.9

57 9.0 121 19.1

58 9.2 122 19.2

59 9.3 123 19.4

60 9.5 124 19.5

61 9.7 125 19.7

62 9.8 126 19.8

63 10.0 127 20.0

Data Value Data Value

0 0.1 64 201.6

1 3.2 65 204.8

2 6.4 66 207.9

3 9.5 67 211.1

4 12.7 68 214.2

5 15.8 69 217.4

6 19.0 70 220.5

7 22.1 71 223.7

8 25.3 72 226.8

9 28.4 73 230.0

10 31.6 74 233.1

11 34.7 75 236.3

12 37.9 76 239.4

13 41.0 77 242.6

14 44.2 78 245.7

15 47.3 79 248.9

16 50.5 80 252.0

17 53.6 81 255.2

18 56.8 82 258.3

19 59.9 83 261.5

20 63.1 84 264.6

21 66.2 85 267.7

22 69.4 86 270.9

23 72.5 87 274.0

24 75.7 88 277.2

25 78.8 89 280.3

26 82.0 90 283.5

27 85.1 91 286.6

28 88.3 92 289.8

29 91.4 93 292.9

30 94.6 94 296.1

31 97.7 95 299.2

32 100.9 96 302.4

33 104.0 97 305.5

34 107.2 98 308.7

35 110.3 99 311.8

36 113.5 100 315.0

37 116.6 101 318.1

38 119.8 102 321.3

39 122.9 103 324.4

40 126.1 104 327.6

41 129.2 105 330.7

42 132.4 106 333.9

43 135.5 107 337.0

44 138.6 108 340.2

45 141.8 109 343.3

46 144.9 110 346.5

47 148.1 111 349.6

48 151.2 112 352.8

49 154.4 113 355.9

50 157.5 114 359.1

51 160.7 115 362.2

52 163.8 116 365.4

53 167.0 117 368.5

54 170.1 118 371.7

55 173.3 119 374.8

56 176.4 120 378.0

57 179.6 121 381.1

58 182.7 122 384.3

59 185.9 123 387.4

60 189.0 124 390.6

61 192.2 125 393.7

62 195.3 126 396.9

63 198.5 127 400.0

Data Value Data Value

011012

121114

231216

341318

451420

561523

671626

781730

891835

9101940

Data Value Data Value

010885

1159100

22510115

33511140

44512170

55513230

66514340

77515680

Data Value Data Value

0 1.0 4 5.0

1 1.5 5 7.0

2 2.0 6 10.0

3 3.0 7 20.0

Data Value Data Value

0 0.5 64 17.6

1 0.8 65 17.9

2 1.0 66 18.2

3 1.3 67 18.5

4 1.5 68 18.8

5 1.8 69 19.1

6 2.0 70 19.4

7 2.3 71 19.7

8 2.6 72 20.0

9 2.8 73 20.2

10 3.1 74 20.5

11 3.3 75 20.8

12 3.6 76 21.1

13 3.9 77 21.4

14 4.1 78 21.7

15 4.4 79 22.0

16 4.6 80 22.4

17 4.9 81 22.7

18 5.2 82 23.0

19 5.4 83 23.3

20 5.7 84 23.6

21 5.9 85 23.9

22 6.2 86 24.2

23 6.5 87 24.5

24 6.7 88 24.9

25 7.0 89 25.2

26 7.2 90 25.5

27 7.5 91 25.8

28 7.8 92 26.1

29 8.0 93 26.5

30 8.3 94 26.8

31 8.6 95 27.1

32 8.8 96 27.5

33 9.1 97 27.8

34 9.4 98 28.1

35 9.6 99 28.5

36 9.9 100 28.8

37 10.2 101 29.2

38 10.4 102 29.5

39 10.7 103 29.9

40 11.0 104 30.2

41 11.2

42 11.5

43 11.8

44 12.1

45 12.3

46 12.6

47 12.9

48 13.1

49 13.4

50 13.7

51 14.0

52 14.2

53 14.5

54 14.8

55 15.1

56 15.4

57 15.6

58 15.9

59 16.2

60 16.5

61 16.8

62 17.1

63 17.3

Data Value

52 10.0

53 15.0

54 25.0

55 35.0

56 45.0

57 55.0

58 65.0

59 75.0

60 85.0

61 100.0

62 115.0

63 140.0

64 170.0

65 230.0

66 340.0

67 680.0

Data Value Data Value

0 44.1K 64 678.0

1 22.1K 65 668.0

2 14.7K 66 658.0

3 11.0K 67 649.0

4 8.8K 68 639.0

5 7.4K 69 630.0

6 6.3K 70 621.0

7 5.5K 71 613.0

8 4.9K 72 604.0

9 4.5K 73 596.0

10 4.0K 74 588.0

11 3.7K 75 580.0

12 3.4K 76 573.0

13 3.2K 77 565.0

14 2.9K 78 558.0

15 2.8K 79 551.0

16 2.6K 80 544.0

17 2.5K 81 538.0

18 2.3K 82 531.0

19 2.2K 83 525.0

20 2.1K 84 519.0

21 2.0K 85 513.0

22 1.92K 86 507.0

23 1.84K 87 501.0

24 1.76K 88 496.0

25 1.70K 89 490.0

26 1.63K 90 485.0

27 1.58K 91 479.0

28 1.52K 92 474.0

29 1.47K 93 469.0

30 1.42K 94 464.0

31 1.38K 95 459.0

32 1.34K 96 455.0

33 1.30K 97 450.0

34 1.26K 98 445.0

35 1.23K 99 441.0

36 1.19K 100 437.0

37 1.16K 101 432.0

38 1.13K 102 428.0

39 1.10K 103 424.0

40 1.08K 104 420.0

41 1.05K 105 416.0

42 1.03K 106 412.0

43 1.00K 107 408.0

44 980.0 108 405.0

45 959.0 109 401.0

46 938.0 110 397.0

47 919.0 111 394.0

48 900.0 112 390.0

49 882.0 113 387.0

50 865.0 114 383.0

51 848.0 115 380.0

52 832.0 116 377.0

53 817.0 117 374.0

54 802.0 118 371.0

55 788.0 119 368.0

56 774.0 120 364.0

57 760.0 121 361.0

58 747.0 122 359.0

59 735.0 123 356.0

60 723.0 124 353.0

61 711.0 125 350.0

62 700.0 126 347.0

63 689.0 127 345.0

Data Value Data Value

0 64th/3 64 4thX51

1 64th. 65 4thX52

2 32th 66 4thX53

3 32th/3 67 4thX54

4 32th. 68 4thX55

5 16th 69 4thX56

6 16th/3 70 4thX57

7 16th. 71 4thX58

8 8th 72 4thX59

9 8th/3 73 4thX60

10 8th. 74 4thX61

11 4th 75 4thX62

12 4th/3 76 4thX63

13 4th. 77 4thX64

14 2nd

15 2nd/3

16 2nd.

17 4thX4

18 4thX5

19 4thX6

20 4thX7

21 4thX8

22 4thX9

23 4thX10

24 4thX11

25 4thX12

26 4thX13

27 4thX14

28 4thX15

29 4thX16

30 4thX17

31 4thX18

32 4thX19

33 4thX20

34 4thX21

35 4thX22

36 4thX23

37 4thX24

38 4thX25

39 4thX26

40 4thX27

41 4thX28

42 4thX29

43 4thX30

44 4thX31

45 4thX32

46 4thX33

47 4thX34

48 4thX35

49 4thX36

50 4thX37

51 4thX38

52 4thX39

53 4thX40

54 4thX41

55 4thX42

56 4thX43

57 4thX44

58 4thX45

59 4thX46

60 4thX47

61 4thX48

62 4thX49

63 4thX50

CP300 Owner’s Manual

125

Appendix

MIDI Data Format

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers.

Hexadecimal numbers may include the letter “H” as a sufﬁx.

Also, "n" can freely be deﬁned as any whole number. To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

• Except the table above, for example 144-159 (decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001 1111 (binary) denotes the Note On Message for each channel

(1-16). 176-191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 denotes the Control Change Message for each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100

1111 denotes the Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message.

247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.

• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address contains High, Mid, and Low.

• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.

• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.

• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Binary Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Binary Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Binary Decimal Hexa-

decimal

Binary

0000000 0000 32 20 0010 0000 64 40 0100 0000 96 60 0110 0000

1010000 0001 33 21 0010 0001 65 41 0100 0001 97 61 0110 0001

2020000 0010 34 22 0010 0010 66 42 0100 0010 98 62 0110 0010

3030000 0011 35 23 0010 0011 67 43 0100 0011 99 63 0110 0011

4040000 0100 36 24 0010 0100 68 44 0100 0100 100 64 0110 0100

5050000 0101 37 25 0010 0101 69 45 0100 0101 101 65 0110 0101

6060000 0110 38 26 0010 0110 70 46 0100 0110 102 66 0110 0110

7070000 0111 39 27 0010 0111 71 47 0100 0111 103 67 0110 0111

8080000 1000 40 28 0010 1000 72 48 0100 1000 104 68 0110 1000

9090000 1001 41 29 0010 1001 73 49 0100 1001 105 69 0110 1001

10 0A 0000 1010 42 2A 0010 1010 74 4A 0100 1010 106 6A 0110 1010

11 0B 0000 1011 43 2B 0010 1011 75 4B 0100 1011 107 6B 0110 1011

12 0C 0000 1100 44 2C 0010 1100 76 4C 0100 1100 108 6C 0110 1100

13 0D 0000 1101 45 2D 0010 1101 77 4D 0100 1101 109 6D 0110 1101

14 0E 0000 1110 46 2E 0010 1110 78 4E 0100 1110 110 6E 0110 1110

15 0F 0000 1111 47 2F 0010 1111 79 4F 0100 1111 111 6F 0110 1111

16 10 0001 0000 48 30 0011 0000 80 50 0101 0000 112 70 0111 0000

17 11 0001 0001 49 31 0011 0001 81 51 0101 0001 113 71 0111 0001

18 12 0001 0010 50 32 0011 0010 82 52 0101 0010 114 72 0111 0010

19 13 0001 0011 51 33 0011 0011 83 53 0101 0011 115 73 0111 0011

20 14 0001 0100 52 34 0011 0100 84 54 0101 0100 116 74 0111 0100

21 15 0001 0101 53 35 0011 0101 85 55 0101 0101 117 75 0111 0101

22 16 0001 0110 54 36 0011 0110 86 56 0101 0110 118 76 0111 0110

23 17 0001 0111 55 37 0011 0111 87 57 0101 0111 119 77 0111 0111

24 18 0001 1000 56 38 0011 1000 88 58 0101 1000 120 78 0111 1000

25 19 0001 1001 57 39 0011 1001 89 59 0101 1001 121 79 0111 1001

26 1A 0001 1010 58 3A 0011 1010 90 5A 0101 1010 122 7A 0111 1010

27 1B 0001 1011 59 3B 0011 1011 91 5B 0101 1011 123 7B 0111 1011

28 1C 0001 1100 60 3C 0011 1100 92 5C 0101 1100 124 7C 0111 1100

29 1D 0001 1101 61 3D 0011 1101 93 5D 0101 1101 125 7D 0111 1101

30 1E 0001 1110 62 3E 0011 1110 94 5E 0101 1110 126 7E 0111 1110

31 1F 0001 1111 63 3F 0011 1111 95 5F 0101 1111 127 7F 0111 1111

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

126

Appendix

MIDI CHANNEL MESSAGE (1)

MIDI Events

Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)

MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Status Data (HEX) Parameter Data (HEX) Parameter Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

Key Off 8nH

(n: Channel

Number)

kk Key no. (0 – 127) vv Velocity (0 – 127) Ø Ø Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

Key On 9nH

(n: Channel

Number)

kk Key no. (0 – 127) vv

Key On:

vv=1 – 127

Key Off: vv=0

ØØ Ø

(Keyboard)

Ø˛ Ø

Control

Change

BnH

0 (00H) Bank Select MSB

126

127

(00H)

(40H)

(7EH)

(7FH)

Normal

SFX Voice

SFX kit

Drum kit

ØØ ˛

(Voice)

Ø˛ Ø

1 (01H) Modulation 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Modulation Wheel)

Ø˛ Ø

5 (05H) Portamento Time 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

6 (06H) Data Entry MSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

7 (07H) Main Volume 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

10 (0AH) Panpot 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

L64 Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

11 (0BH) Expression 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal1 – 4,

Modulation Wheel)

Ø˛ Ø

32 (20H) Bank Select LSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø ˛

(Voice)

Ø˛ Ø

38 (26H) Data Entry LSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

64 (40H) Sustain (Damper) 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal1 – 4)

Ø˛ Ø

65 (41H) Portamento 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

0...63, 64...127

(OFF, ON)

ØØ

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

66 (42H) Sostenuto 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

0...63, 64...127

(OFF, ON)

ØØ

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal1 – 4)

Ø˛ Ø

67 (43H) Soft Pedal 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

0...63, 64...127

(OFF, ON)

ØØ

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal1 – 4)

Ø˛ Ø

71 (47H) Harmonic Content 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

-64...0...+63 Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel, VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

72 (48H) Release Time 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

-64...0...+63 Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

73 (49H) Attack Time 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

-64...0...+63 Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

74 (4AH) Brightness 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

-64...0...+63 Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel, VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

84 (54H) Portamento Control 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Key no. (0 – 127) Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

91 (5BH)

Effect1 Depth

(Reverb Send Level)

0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel, VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

93 (5DH)

Effect3 Depth

(Chorus Send Level)

0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel, VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

94 (5EH)

Effect4 Depth

(Variation Send Level)

0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

96 (60H) RPN Increment – –

The data byte is

ignored.

ØØ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

97 (61H) RPN Decrement – –

The data byte is

ignored.

ØØ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

98 (62H) NRPN LSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

99 (63H) NRPN MSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

100 (64H) RPN LSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

101 (65H) RPN MSB 0 – 127

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

0 – 119

(00H...77H)

(Assignable)

0 – 127

(00H...7FH)

Data ˛ ˛ ˛

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel)

˛˛ ˛

Mode

Message

BnH

(n: Channel

Number)

120 (78H) All Sound Off 0 (00H) Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

121 (79H) Reset All Controllers 0 (00H) Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

123 (7BH) All Note Off 0 (00H) Data Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

124 (7CH) Omni Off 0 (00H) Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

125 (7DH) Omni On 0 (00H) Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

126 (7EH) Mono 0 – 16

(00H...

10H)

Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

127 (7FH) Poly 0 (00H) Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

Program

Change

CnH

(n: Channel

Number)

(00H...

7FH)

Voice number

(0 – 127)

–– – ØØ ˛

(Voice)

Ø˛ Ø

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

127

Appendix

MIDI CHANNEL MESSAGE (2)

Parameters controlled by NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Numbers)

NRPN MSB: 14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum Voice.

Data Entry LSB: Ignored.

Parameters controlled by RPN (Registered Parameter Numbers)

Channel After

Touch

DnH

(n: Channel

Number)

(00H...

7FH)

Data – – – Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pedal4, Modulation

Wheel)

Ø˛ ˛

Polyphonic

After Touch

AnH

(n: Channel

Number)

(00H...

7FH)

Key no. (0 – 127) vv

(00H...

7FH)

Data Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

Pitch Bend

Change

EnH

(n: Channel

Number)

(00H...

7FH)

LSB dd

(00H...

7FH)

MSB Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Pitch Bend Wheel)

Ø˛ Ø

Realtime

Message

F8H MIDI Clock – – – – ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

FAH Start – – – – ˛ ˛ ˛

FBH Continue – – – – ˛ ˛ ˛

FCH Stop – – – – ˛ ˛ ˛

FEH

Active

Sense

–––– Ø Ø˛

FFH

System

Reset

–––– ˛ ˛˛

NRPN Data Entry

Parameter Data Range

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)

MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

MSB LSB MSB LSB Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

01H 08H mmH – Vibrato Rate mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 09H mmH – Vibrato Depth mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 0AH mmH – Vibrato Delay mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 20H mmH –

Low Pass Filter Cutoff

Frequency

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 21H mmH – Low Pass Filter Resonance mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 30H mmH – EQ BASS mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 31H mmH – EQ TREBLE mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 34H mmH – EQ BASS Frequency mm: 04H-28H (32...2.0k[Hz]) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 35H mmH – EQ TREBLE Frequency mm: 1CH-3AH (500...16.0k[Hz]) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 63H mmH – EG Attack Time mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 64H mmH – EG Decay Time mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01H 66H mmH – EG Release mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63) Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

14H rrH mmH –

Drum Low Pass Filter Cutoff

Frequency

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

15H rrH mmH –

Drum Low Pass Filter

Resonance

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

16H rrH mmH – Drum EG Attack Rate

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

17H rrH mmH – Drum EG Decay Rate

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

18H rrH mmH – Drum Pitch Coarse

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

19H rrH mmH – Drum Pitch Fine

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-40H-7FH (-64...0...+63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

1AH rrH mmH – Drum Level

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-7FH (0...127)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

1CH rrH mmH – Drum Pan

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H, 01H-40H-7FH (RND, L63...C...R63)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

1DH rrH mmH – Drum Reverb Send Level

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-7FH (0...127)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

1EH rrH mmH – Drum Chorus Send Level

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-7FH (0...127)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

1FH rrH mmH – Drum Variation Send Level

rr: drum instrument note number

mm: 00H-7FH (0...127)

(Variation Connection = SYSTEM)

mm: 00H, 01H-7FH (OFF, ON)

(Variation Connection = INSERTION)

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

RPN Data Entry

Parameter Data Range

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)

MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

MSB LSB MSB LSB Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

00H 00H mmH – Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm: 00H-18H (0...+24[semitones]) Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

00H 01H mmH llH Fine Tune

mm l: 00H 00H -100 [cent]

...

mm ll: 40H 00H 0 [cent]

...

mm ll: 7FH 7FH 100 [cent]

ØØ

(All manually

played parts)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

00H 02H mmH – Coarse Tune mm: 28H-40H-58H (-24...0...+24 [semitones]) Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

7FH 7FH – – Null – Ø Ø

(All manually

played parts)

˛Ø˛˛

MIDI Events

Status byte 1st Data byte 2nd Data byte MIDI Reception (respond/ignore)

MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Status Data (HEX) Parameter Data (HEX) Parameter Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

128

Appendix

MIDI PARAMETER CHANGE TABLE

*Not Received when Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.

*Not transmitted when Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.

MIDI Parameter Change table (XG SYSTEM)

TOTAL SIZE 07

MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM INFORMATION)

TOTAL SIZE 10

Transmitted in response to Dump Request. Not received.

MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT1)

TOTAL SIZE 0E

TOTAL SIZE 06

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

00 00

00-0F

MASTER TUNE

-102.4...0...+102.3 [cent]

1st bit 3-0 → bit 15-12

2nd bit 3-0 → bit 11-8

3rd bit 3-0 → bit 7-4

4th bit 3-0 → bit 3-0

*Panel setting

value

Ø˛Ø˛˛

04 1 00-7F MASTER VOLUME 0...127 7F Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

05 1 00-7F MASTER ATTENUATOR 0...127 00 ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

06 1 28-58 TRANSPOSE -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

7D 1 N DRUM SETUP RESET N: Drum setup number – Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

7E 1 00 XG SYSTEM ON 00=XG system ON – Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ Ø

7F 1 00 ALL PARAMETER RESET 00=ON – Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

01 00

...

20-7F

...

20-7F

Model Name 1

...

Model Name 14

32...127 (ASCII CHARACTER)

...

32...127 (ASCII CHARACTER)

–– – ˛ ˛Ø˛

0E 1 NOT USED

0F 1 NOT USED

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

02 01 00 2

00-7F

REVERB TYPE MSB

REVERB TYPE LSB

Refer to Effect Parameter List

01 (=HALL1)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

02 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

03 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

04 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

05 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

06 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

07 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

08 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

09 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

0A 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

0B 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

0C 1 00-7F REVERB RETURN -∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0D 1 01-7F REVERB PAN L63...C...R63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

02 01 10 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

11 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

12 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

13 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

14 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

15 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16 :

Depends on

Reverb type

(*Depends on Reverb type)

˛Ø˛˛

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

129

Appendix

TOTAL SIZE 0F

TOTAL SIZE 06

TOTAL SIZE 21

TOTAL SIZE 06

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

02 01 20 2

00-7F

CHORUS TYPE MSB

CHORUS TYPE LSB

Refer to Effect Parameter List

41 (=CHORUS1)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

22 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

23 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

24 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

25 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

26 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

27 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

28 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

29 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

2A 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

2B 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

2C 1 00-7F CHORUS RETURN -∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

2D 1 01-7F CHORUS PAN L63...C...R63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

2E 1 00-7F

SEND CHORUS TO REVERB

-∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 00 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

02 01 30 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

31 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

32 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

33 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

34 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

35 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16 :

Depends on

Chorus Type

(*Depends on Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛˛

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception

(respond/ignore)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

02 01 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List

05 (=DELAY L,

C, R)

Ø˛Ø˛˛

00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB : 00

42 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

44 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

46 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

48 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

4A 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

4C 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 6 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

4E 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

50 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

52 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

54 2

00-7F

VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB

VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

56 1 00-7F VARIATION RETURN -∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

57 1 01-7F VARIATION PAN L63...C...R63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

58 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB -∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 00 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

59 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS -∞dB...0dB...+6dB (0...64...127) 00 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5A 1 00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION INSERTION, SYSTEM 00 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5B 1 00-7F VARIATION PART NUMBER

Reception: Part1...16 (0...15)

Transmission:

Part1...16 (0...15)

OFF (127)

7F Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5C 1 00-7F MW VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5D 1 00-7F BEND VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5E 1 00-7F CAT VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5F 1 00-7F AC1 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

60 1 00-7F AC2 VARIATION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

02 01 70 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

71 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12 :

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

72 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 :

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

73 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 :

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

74 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 :

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

75 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16 :

Depends on

Variation Type

(*Depends on Variation Type)

˛Ø˛˛

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

130

Appendix

MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI EQ)

TOTAL SIZE 15

MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT2)

TOTAL SIZE 12

TOTAL SIZE 6

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

02 40 00 1 00-04 EQ TYPE flat, jazz, pops, rock, classic

*MULTI EQ is

not reset by the

XG System On.

Ø˛˛˛˛

01 1 34-4C EQ GAIN 1 -12...0...+12 [dB] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

02 1 04-28 EQ FREQUENCY 1 32...2.0k [Hz] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

03 1 01-78 EQ Q 1 0.1...12.0 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

04 1 00-01 EQ SHAPE 1 shelving, peaking Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

05 1 34-4C EQ GAIN 2 -12...0...+12 [dB] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

06 1 0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 2 100...10.0k [Hz] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

07 1 01-78 EQ Q 2 0.1...12.0 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

08 1 NOT USED –––––

09 1 34-4C EQ GAIN 3 -12...0...+12 [dB] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

0A 1 0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 3 100...10.0k [Hz] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

0B 1 01-78 EQ Q 3 0.1...12.0 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

0C 1 NOT USED –––––

0D 1 34-4C EQ GAIN4 -12...0...+12 [dB] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

0E 1 0E-36 EQ FREQUENCY 4 100...10.0k [Hz] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

0F 1 01-78 EQ Q 4 0.1...12.0 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

10 1 NOT USED –––––

11 1 34-4C EQ GAIN 5 -12...0...+12 [dB] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

12 1 1C-3A EQ FREQUENCY 5 0.5k...16.0k [Hz] Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

13 1 01-78 EQ Q 5 0.1...12.0 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

14 1 00-01 EQ SHAPE 5 shelving, peaking Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

03 n 00 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT TYPE MSB

INSERTION EFFECT TYPE LSB

Refer to Effect Parameter List

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

02 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

03 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

04 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

05 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

06 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

07 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

08 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

09 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

0A 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

0B 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

0C 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PART NUMBER

Reception: Part1...16 (0...15)

Transmission: Part1...16 (0...15)

OFF (127)

(Voice)

Ø˛ Ø

0D 1 00-7F MW INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0E 1 00-7F BEND INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0F 1 00-7F CAT INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

10 1 00-7F AC1 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

11 1 00-7F AC2 INSERTION CONTROL DEPTH -64...0...+63 Ø ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

20 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

21 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 12 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

22 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 13 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

23 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 14 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

24 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 15 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

25 1 00-7F INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 16 :

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

30 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 1 LSB

Refer to Effect Parameter List

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

32 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 2 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

34 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 3 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

36 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 4 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

38 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 5 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

3A 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 6 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

3C 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 7 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

3E 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 8 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

131

Appendix

TOTAL SIZE 14

The EFFECT2 Parameter cannot be reset to its factory setting with XG SYSTEM ON.

The second byte of the address is considered as an Insertion effect number.

n: insertion effect number (n = 0 – 2)

For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will be received and the Parameters for Address 30 – 42 will not be received.

For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30 – 42 will be received and the Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will not be received.

When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is received the

Parameters for Address 02 – 0B will not be received.

MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)

TOTAL SIZE 29

40 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 9 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

˛Ø˛˛

42 2

00-7F

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10 MSB

INSERTION EFFECT PARAMETER 10 LSB

(*Depends on Insertion Type)

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

08 nn 00 1 00-20 NOT USED ˛˛ ˛ ˛ ˛˛˛

01 1 00-7F BANK SELECT MSB 0...127

part10=7F,

other parts=00

ØØ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

02 1 00-7F BANK SELECT LSB 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

03 1 00-7F PROGRAM NUMBER 1...128 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

04 1

00-0F,

Rcv CHANNEL 1...16, OFF Part No. Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

05 1 00-01 MONO/POLY MODE MONO, POLY 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

06 1 00-02

SAME NOTE NUMBER KEY ON

ASSIGN

SINGLE, MULTI, INST

(for Drum)

01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

07 1 00-03 PART MODE

NORMAL, DRUM,

DRUMS1...2

part10=02,

other parts=00

Ø˛ ˛

(Drum Voice)

Ø˛ Ø

08 1 28-58 NOTE SHIFT -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

00-0F

DETUNE

-12.8...0...+12.7 [Hz]

1st bit3-0 → bit7-4

2nd bit3-0 → bit3-0

08 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0B 1 00-7F VOLUME 0...127 64 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0C 1 00-7F VELOCITY SENSE DEPTH 0...127 40 Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

0D 1 00-7F VELOCITY SENSE OFFSET 0...127 40 Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

0E 1 00-7F PAN RND, L63...C...R63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0F 1 00-7F NOTE LIMIT LOW C-2...G8 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

10 1 00-7F NOTE LIMIT HIGH C-2...G8 7F Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

11 1 00-7F DRY LEVEL 0...127 7F Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

12 1 00-7F CHORUS SEND 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

13 1 00-7F REVERB SEND 0...127 28 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

14 1 00-7F VARIATION SEND 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

15 1 00-7F VIBRATO RATE -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

16 1 00-7F VIBRATO DEPTH -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

17 1 00-7F VIBRATO DELAY -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

18 1 00-7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

19 1 00-7F FILTER RESONANCE -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1A 1 00-7F EG ATTACK TIME -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1B 1 00-7F EG DECAY TIME -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1C 1 00-7F EG RELEASE TIME -64...0...+63 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1D 1 28-58 MW PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1E 1 00-7F MW LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

1F 1 00-7F MW AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

20 1 00-7F MW LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 0A Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

21 1 00-7F MW LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

22 1 00-7F MW LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

23 1 28-58 BEND PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 42 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

24 1 00-7F BEND LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

25 1 00-7F BEND AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

26 1 00-7F BEND LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

27 1 00-7F BEND LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

28 1 00-7F BEND LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

30 1 00-01 Rcv PITCH BEND OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

31 1 00-01 Rcv CH AFTER TOUCH (CAT) OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

32 1 00-01 Rcv PROGRAM CHANGE OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

33 1 00-01 Rcv CONTROL CHANGE OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

34 1 00-01 Rcv POLY AFTER TOUCH (PAT) OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

35 1 00-01 Rcv NOTE MESSAGE OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

36 1 00-01 Rcv RPN OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

37 1 00-01 Rcv NRPN OFF, ON

XGmode=01,

GMmode=00

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

38 1 00-01 Rcv MODULATION OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

39 1 00-01 Rcv VOLUME OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3A 1 00-01 Rcv PAN OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3B 1 00-01 Rcv EXPRESSION OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3C 1 00-01 Rcv HOLD1 OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3D 1 00-01 Rcv PORTAMENTO OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3E 1 00-01 Rcv SOSTENUTO OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

3F 1 00-01 Rcv SOFT PEDAL OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

40 1 00-01 Rcv BANK SELECT OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

41 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING C -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

132

Appendix

TOTAL SIZE 3F

TOTAL SIZE 04

TOTAL SIZE 0C

nn = PART NUMBER

If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the part, the following parameters are ineffective.

• BANK SELECT LSB

• MONO/POLY MODE

• SCALE TUNING

• PORTAMENTO

• PITCH EG

• FILTER MODULATION DEPTH (FMOD DEPTH)

• AMPLITUDE MODULATION DEPTH (AMOD DEPTH)

42 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING C# -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

43 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING D -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

44 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING D# -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

45 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING E -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

46 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING F -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

47 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING F# -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

48 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING G -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

49 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING G# -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

4A 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING A -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

4B 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING A# -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

4C 1 00-7F SCALE TUNING B -63...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛ Ø

4D 1 28-58 CAT PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

4E 1 00-7F CAT LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

4F 1 00-7F CAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

50 1 00-7F CAT LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

51 1 00-7F CAT LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

52 1 00-7F CAT LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

53 1 28-58 PAT PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

54 1 00-7F PAT LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

55 1 00-7F PAT AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

56 1 00-7F PAT LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

57 1 00-7F PAT LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

58 1 00-7F PAT LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

59 1 00-5F AC1 CONTROLLER NUMBER 0...95 10 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5A 1 28-58 AC1 PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5B 1 00-7F AC1 LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5C 1 00-7F AC1 AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5D 1 00-7F AC1 LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5E 1 00-7F AC1 LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

5F 1 00-7F AC1 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

60 1 00-5F AC2 CONTROLLER NUMBER 0...95 11 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

61 1 28-58 AC2 PITCH CONTROL -24...0...+24 [semitones] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

62 1 00-7F AC2 LOW PASS FILTER CONTROL -9600...0...+9450 [cent] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

63 1 00-7F AC2 AMPLITUDE CONTROL -100...0...+100 [%] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

64 1 00-7F AC2 LFO PMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

65 1 00-7F AC2 LFO FMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

66 1 00-7F AC2 LFO AMOD DEPTH 0...127 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

67 1 00-01 PORTAMENTO SWITCH OFF, ON 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

68 1 00-7F PORTAMENTO TIME 0...127 00 Ø Ø ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

69 1 00-7F PITCH EG INITIAL LEVEL -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

6A 1 00-7F PITCH EG ATTACK TIME -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

6B 1 00-7F PITCH EG RELEASE LEVEL -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

6C 1 00-7F PITCH EG RELEASE TIME -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

6D 1 01-7F VELOCITY LIMIT LOW 1...127 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

6E 1 01-7F VELOCITY LIMIT HIGH 1...127 7F Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

70 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

71 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

72 1 00-7F EQ BASS GAIN -12dB...+12dB 40 Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

73 1 00-7F EQ TREBLE GAIN -12dB...+12dB 40 Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

74 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

75 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

76 1 04-28 EQ BASS FREQUENCY 32...2.0k[Hz] 0C Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

77 1 1C-3A EQ TREBLE FREQUENCY 500...16.0k[Hz] 36 Ø Ø ˛

(VOICE EDIT)

Ø˛ Ø

78 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

79 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7A 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7B 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7C 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7D 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7E 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

7F 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

133

Appendix

MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP)

TOTAL SIZE 10

TOTAL SIZE 0E

n: Drum Setup Number (0-1)

rr: note number (0D-5B)

In the following cases, the PF-500 will initialize all Drum Setups.

XG SYSTEM ON received

GM SYSTEM ON received

DRUM SETUP RESET received (only when in XG mode)

When a part to which a Drum Setup is assigned receives a program change, the assigned Drum Setup will be initialized.

If the same Drum Setup is assigned to two or more parts, changes in Drum Setup parameters (including program changes) will apply to all parts to which it is assigned.

System Exclusive Messages (1)

*Not Received when Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.

*Not transmitted when Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.

System Exclusive Messages (Universal Realtime messages)

System Exclusive Messages (Universal Non Realtime messages)

Address

(H)

Size

(H)

Data

(H)

Parameter Description

XG Default

(H)

MIDI Reception (respond/ignore) MIDI Transmission (generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel

(main generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

3n rr 00 1 00-7F PITCH COARSE -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

01 1 00-7F PITCH FINE -64...0...+63 [cent] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

02 1 00-7F LEVEL 0...127

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

03 1 00-7F ALTERNATE GROUP OFF, 1...127

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

04 1 00-7F PAN RND, L63...C...R63

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

05 1 00-7F REVERB SEND 0...127

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

06 1 00-7F CHORUS SEND 0...127

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

07 1 00-7F VARIATION SEND 0...127 7F Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

08 1 00-01 KEY ASSIGN SINGLE, MULTI 00 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

09 1 00-01 Rcv NOTE OFF OFF, ON

Depends on the

note

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ Ø˛˛

0A 1 00-01 Rcv NOTE ON OFF, ON 01 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0B 1 00-7F

LOW PASS FILTER CUTOFF

FREQUENCY

-64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0C 1 00-7F LOW PASS FILTER RESONANCE -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0D 1 00-7F EG ATTACK RATE -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0E 1 00-7F EG DECAY1 RATE -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

0F 1 00-7F EG DECAY2 RATE -64...0...+63 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

20 1 00-7F EQ BASS GAIN -12...+12 [dB] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

21 1 00-7F EQ TREBLE GAIN -12...+12 [dB] 40 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

22 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

23 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

24 1 04-28 EQ BASS FREQUENCY 32...2.0k [Hz] 0C Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

25 1 1C-3A EQ TREBLE FREQUENCY 500...16.0k [Hz] 36 Ø ˛ ˛ ˛ Ø ˛ ˛

26 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

27 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

28 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

29 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

2A 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

2B 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

2C 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

2D 1 NOT USED – – – – – – – –

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the

panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

Master

Volume

F0 7F XN 04 01 SS TT F7

Ø˛ ˛ ˛ ˛

(Output as XG

Master Volume)

˛˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01111111 7F

= Universal Real Time

0xxxnnnn XN

= When N is received N = 0-F, whichever is

received. X = ignored

00000100 04

= Sub-ID #1 = Device Control Message

00000001 01

= Sub-ID #2 = Master Volume

0sssssss SS

= Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT

= Volume MSB

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the

panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

REC

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

Recorded

from

panel

GM1

System On

F0 7E XN 09 01 F7

Ø˛ ˛

(VOICE EDIT

Reverb Type

Chorus Type)

˛Ø˛Ø

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01111110 7E

= Universal Non-Real Time

0xxxnnnn XN

= When N is received N = 0-F, whichever is

received. X = ignored

00001001 09

= Sub-ID #1 = General MIDI Message

00000001 01

= Sub-ID #2 = General MIDI On

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

Ø: Available

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

134

Appendix

System Exclusive Messages (2)

*Not received when the Receive Parameter SysEx is set to off.

*Not transmitted when the Transmit Parameter SysEx is set to off.

System Exclusive Messages (XG)

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the

panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

XG Parameter

Change

F0 43 1n 4C hh mm ll dd ... F7

*Refer to Parameter Change

Table

–

*Refer to Parameter

Change Table

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1n

= Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit),

n = 0-F (when receive)

01001100 4C

= Model ID

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

0ddddddd dd

= Data

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

XG Bulk Dump

F0 43 0n 4C aa bb hh mm ll dd ... dd cc F7

*Refer to Parameter Change

Table

–

*Refer to Parameter

Change Table

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit),

n = 0-F (when receive)

01001100 4C

= Model ID

0aaaaaaa aa

= Byte Count MSB

0bbbbbbb bb

= Byte Count LSB

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

0ddddddd dd

= Data

0ddddddd dd

= Data

0ccccccc cc

= Checksum

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

XG Parameter

Request

F0 43 3n 4C hh mm ll F7

*Refer to Parameter Change

Table

–˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0011nnnn 3n

= Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit),

n = 0-F (when receive)

01001100 4C

= Model ID

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

XG Dump

Request

F0 43 2n 4C hh mm ll dd F7

*Refer to Parameter Change

Table

–˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2n

= Device Number n = always 0 (when transmit),

n = 0-F (when receive)

01001100 4C

= Model ID

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

135

Appendix

System Exclusive Message (Preset Voice)

*For each Depth value, the reset value is 40H = Voice parameter.

System Exclusive Message (Other)

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the

panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

String

Resonance

Depth

F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 02 dd F7

ØØ ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

01110011 73

= Clavinova ID

00000001 01

= Model ID (Clavinova common ID)

01010000 50

= Sub ID

00010001 11

= Sub ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Channel (00 – 0F)

00000010 02

= Sub ID (String Resonance Depth)

0ddddddd dd

= Depth (00 – 48)

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

Sustain

Sampling

Depth

F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 03 dd F7

ØØ ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

01110011 73

= Clavinova ID

00000001 01

= Model ID (Clavinova common ID)

01010000 50

= Sub ID

00010001 11

= Sub ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Channel (00 – 0F)

00000011 03

= Sub ID (Sustain Sampling Depth)

0ddddddd dd

= Depth (00 – 48)

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

Key-off

Sampling

Depth

F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 04 dd F7

ØØ ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

01110011 73

= Clavinova ID

00000001 01

= Model ID (Clavinova common ID)

01010000 50

= Sub ID

00010001 11

= Sub ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Channel (00 – 0F)

00000100 04

= Sub ID (Key-off Sampling Depth)

0ddddddd dd

= Depth (00 – 50)

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

Soft Pedal

Depth

F0 43 73 01 50 11 0n 05 dd F7

ØØ ˛

(Other Setting)

Ø˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

01110011 73

= Clavinova ID

00000001 01

= Model ID (Clavinova common ID)

01010000 50

= Sub ID

00010001 11

= Sub ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Channel (00 – 0F)

00000101 05

= Sub ID (Soft Pedal Depth)

0ddddddd dd

= Depth (00 – 7F)

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the

panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

MIDI Master

Tuning

F0 43 1n 27 30 00 00 Om Ol cc F7

(Other Setting)

˛Ø˛

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1n

n = always 0 (when transmit), n = 0-F (when receive)

00100111 27

= Model ID of TG100

00110000 30

= Address High

00000000 00

= Address Mid

00000000 00

= Address Low

0000mmmm 0m

= Master Tune MSB

0000llll 0l

= Master Tune LSB

0ccccccc cc

= irrelevant

11110111 F7

= End of Exclusive

MIDI Data Format

CP300 Owner’s Manual

136

Appendix

System Exclusive Message (Data Bulk )

MIDI Event Data Format

MIDI Reception

(effective or not for each part)

MIDI Reception

(affecting the panel)

MIDI Transmission

(generated data)

Song

Main

Layer

Left

Left Layer

Keyboard

Panel (main

generation

method)

Song Midi

Data Bulk

Dump

F0 43 0n xx yy zz aa bb cc dd hh mm ll dd ... dd sum F7

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0n

= Device Number n = always 0

0xxxxxxx 7F

= Model ID High

0zzzzzzz 04

= Model ID Low

0aaaaaaa aa

= Byte Count MSB

0bbbbbbb bb

= Byte Count LSB

0ccccccc cc

= The number of available MSB

0ddddddd dd

= The number of available LSB

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

0ddddddd dd

= Data

0ddddddd dd

= Data

0ccccccc cc

= Checksum

Data Bulk

Dump Request

F0 43 2n xx yy zz hh mm ll F7

11110000 F0

= Exclusive status

01000011 43

= YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 2n

= Device Number n = always 0

0xxxxxxx 7F

= Model ID High

0zzzzzzz 04

= Model ID Low

0hhhhhhh hh

= Address High

0mmmmmmm mm

= Address Mid

0lllllll ll

= Address Low

Function Address High Address Mid Address Low

Bulk Header 10 00 00

Current

(End)

20 00

Performance

(End)

30 00

Voice Setting

(End)

40 00

Bulk Footer 11 00 00

–

(Other than the Data Bulk)

(Performance)

–

(Voice Setting)

–

(Bulk)

(Bulk Current)

(Bulk

Performance)

(Bulk Voice)

(Bulk)

(Bulk Request)

Function Address High Address Mid Address Low

Current,

Performance,

Voice Setting

00 00 00

–

– –

–

CP300 Owner’s Manual

137

Appendix

TransmittedFunction... Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Note

Number : True voice

Velocity

After

Touch

Pitch Bend

Control

Change

Prog

Change : True #

System Exclusive

Common : Song Pos.

: Song Sel.

: Tune

System : Clock

Real Time : Commands

: All Sound Off

Aux :

Reset

All

Cntrls

: Local ON/OFF

Mes- : All Notes OFF

sages: Active Sense

: Reset

Note :

Mode

Default

Changed

Note ON

Note OFF

Key's

Ch's

0,32

7,10,11

6,38

64,66,67

71,74

72,73

84,94

91,93

96-97

98-99

100-101

1-119

1 - 16

Ø 9nH,v=1-127

˛ 9nH,v=0

Ø (Assignable)

0 - 127

**************

0 - 127

**************

Mode 1 : OMNI ON , POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON ,MONO

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF,MONO

Ø Ø 0 - 24 semi

1 - 16

Ø 9nH,v=1-127

Ø (120,126,127)

Ø (121)

˛ (122)

Ø (123-125)

0 - 127

Ø : Yes

˛ : No

Default

Messages

Altered

YAMAHA [ Stage Piano ] Date :1-NOV-2005

CP300 MIDI Implementation Chart

Version : 1.0

Bank Select

Modulation

Portamento Time

Data Entry

Portamento

Sound Controller

RPN Inc,Dec

NRPN LSB,MSB

RPN LSB,MSB

Ø 0 - 127

*1= Transmission only

MIDI Implementation Chart

CP300 Owner’s Manual

138

Appendix

Specifications

*: Refer to the Effect Type List on page 114.

Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify

products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale,

please check with your Yamaha dealer.

Item CP300

Keyboard GH keyboard 88 keys (A-1 – C7)

Sound Source AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling

Polyphony (max.) 128

Voice Selection Presets: 50 Voices

XG Voices: 480 Voices + 12 Drum kits

Performance 64 Performamces x 56 files (max.)

Effect* Reverb*, Chorus*, Master Equalizer, Variation effect*, Insertion effect* x 3

Controller Master Volume Dial, Pitch Bend Wheel, Modulation Wheel, Master Equalizer Slider, Zone Control

Slider, Song Volume Slider

Display 24 characters x 2 lines, LCD with back-light

Recording/Playback 16-track recording/playback, Tempo adjustment, max. capacity: 1.4 MB, 140,000 notes

Jacks/Connectors MIDI (IN/OUT/THRU), PHONES, INPUT (L/MONO, R), OUTPUT (L/MONO, R), OUTPUT (L/R),

ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL (SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO/SOFT/AUX), USB TO HOST, AC INLET

Main Amplifiers 30 W x 2

Speakers 13 cm x 2

Dimensions (W x D x H) 1391 x 460 x 170mm (54-3/4" x 18-1/8" x 6-15/16")

Weight 32.5 kg (71 lbs., 10 oz)

Accessories AC Power Cord, Foot Pedal FC3, Owner’s Manual

CP300 Owner’s Manual

139

Appendix

Index

Numerics

[1] – [16] buttons .......................................................... 73

A [–][+] buttons ............................................................ 15

[AC INLET] jack ............................................................ 11

Application Index .......................................................... 10

[ASSIGNABLE FOOT PEDAL] jacks ............................. 11

[AUX] jack ..................................................................... 33

AUX pedal ....................................................................33

B [– (NO)][+(YES)] buttons ........................................... 15

Bar ................................................................................ 42

Basic operation ............................................................. 15

Bulk Dump .................................................................... 66

C [–][+] button .............................................................. 15

Character Code ............................................................ 84

Chorus .......................................................................... 35

[CHORUS] button ......................................................... 35

Click .............................................................................. 38

[CLICK] button .............................................................. 38

Connections

computer ................................................................ 92

external audio equipment ...................................... 88

external instrument ................................................89

external MIDI keyboard ......................................... 90

[CONTRAST] knob ....................................................... 13

Current memory ............................................................ 82

D [–][+] buttons ............................................................ 15

Delete

Performance file ..................................................... 80

Song file ................................................................. 83

Demo Songs ................................................................. 23

Display

adjust the brightness ............................................. 13

settings .................................................................. 15

Dual .............................................................................. 29

Effect Data Assign Table ............................................ 123

Effect Parameter List ..................................................115

Effect Type List ........................................................... 114

Equalizer (EQ) .............................................................. 36

[EXIT] button ................................................................. 15

Factory Set .............................................................. 16, 71

Factory Setting List .....................................................101

Factory-programmed settings ......................................16

Fast Forward ................................................................. 50

Fast Rewind ..................................................................50

File ................................................................................17

GM System Level 1 .....................................................100

Headphones .................................................................12

INPUT [L/MONO][R] jack .............................................. 89

Insertion effect ..............................................................35

Keyboard part combinations ........................................27

Layer part ......................................................................27

Left Layer part ...............................................................27

Left part .........................................................................27

List

Effect Parameter List ............................................115

Effect Type List .................................................... 114

Factory Setting List .............................................. 101

Master Settings ....................................................102

Message List ..........................................................94

MIDI Settings ........................................................101

Other Settings ......................................................101

Preset Performance List .......................................106

Program Change List ........................................... 105

Song Settings .......................................................102

Voice List ..............................................................103

XG Drum Kit List ................................................... 112

XG Voice List ........................................................108

Load From Memory ....................................................... 79

Main part .......................................................................27

[MASTER] button ..........................................................39

[MASTER EDIT] button ................................................. 53

Master EQ ..................................................................... 36

MASTER EQ EDIT [▼][▲] buttons ................................72

Master Equalizer settings ............................................. 72

[MASTER EQUALIZER] sliders ..................................... 36

Master mode .................................................................39

Master settings ............................................................. 53

Master Volume .............................................................. 13

[MASTER VOLUME] dial ...............................................13

Memory .........................................................................49

Memory Backup ............................................................71

Index

CP300 Owner’s Manual

140

Appendix

Message List ................................................................94

MIDI [IN][OUT][THRU] connectors .............................. 90

MIDI channel ................................................................63

MIDI data compatibility ............................................... 100

MIDI Data Format .......................................................125

MIDI Implementation Chart ......................................... 137

[MIDI OUT] button ........................................................ 51

MIDI Panic .................................................................... 52

[MIDI SETTING] button ................................................. 64

MIDI Settings ................................................................ 63

Modulation wheel .......................................................... 34

[OTHER SETTING] button ............................................ 67

Other Settings ............................................................... 67

OUTPUT [L/MONO][R] jacks ........................................ 88

OUTPUT [L][R] jacks .................................................... 89

Panel Lock .................................................................... 51

[PANEL LOCK] button .................................................. 51

Parameter

Master Edit ............................................................. 54

MIDI Settings .........................................................65

Other Settings ........................................................ 68

Song Settings ......................................................... 86

Voice Edit ............................................................... 58

Part EQ .........................................................................36

Pedal ............................................................................. 33

Pedal functions ....................................................... 61, 62

Perf. Name .................................................................... 78

[PERFORM.FILE] button ............................................... 76

Performance ................................................................. 77

rename ................................................................... 78

save to a button ..................................................... 77

[PERFORMANCE] button ............................................. 40

Performance file

basic operation ...................................................... 76

defined ................................................................... 73

delete ..................................................................... 80

recall from the storage memory ............................. 79

rename ................................................................... 80

save as ................................................................... 79

Performance functions .................................................. 73

Performance parameters .............................................. 74

[PHONES] jack ............................................................. 12

Pitch Bend wheel .......................................................... 34

[POWER] switch ..................................................... 11, 12

Precautions ..................................................................... 4

Preset ...................................................................... 18, 49

Preset Performance file ................................................ 40

Preset Performance List .............................................106

Program Change List .................................................. 105

Quantize ....................................................................... 86

[REC] button .................................................................42

Recording

Dual mode ..............................................................48

live performance ..............................................41, 42

Split mode .............................................................. 48

Recording Techniques

adding data ............................................................46

changing Tempo after recording ........................... 46

changing Voice after recording .............................46

overwriting ..............................................................46

re-recording parts .................................................. 44

Recording track ............................................................42

Rename

Performance ...........................................................78

Performance file ..................................................... 80

Song file .................................................................83

Rename File .................................................................. 80

Rename Song ...............................................................83

Reverb ..........................................................................35

[REVERB] button ........................................................... 35

Save

Performance ...........................................................77

Performance file ..................................................... 79

Recorded Song ......................................................82

Save As .........................................................................79

Save To Memory ........................................................... 82

Scale .............................................................................68

[SOFT] jack ................................................................... 33

Soft pedal ......................................................................33

Song ..............................................................................41

Song file

basic operation ......................................................81

defined ...................................................................81

delete .....................................................................83

rename ...................................................................83

save to memory ......................................................82

Song playback ..............................................................49

Song Repeat ................................................................. 87

SONG SELECT [N][O] buttons .........................42, 49

Song Settings ................................................................85

[SONG VOLUME] slider ................................................ 47

[SOSTENUTO] jack ....................................................... 33

Sostenuto pedal ............................................................33

[SPEAKER] button ........................................................ 52

Speakers (built-in) On/Off ............................................. 52

Specifications .............................................................138

Split ...............................................................................31

[SPLIT] button ............................................................... 31

Split Point ................................................................ 32, 69

Storage memory ............................................... 17, 73, 82

[SUSTAIN] jack ............................................................. 33

Sustain pedal ................................................................ 33

Synchro Start ................................................................ 50

System effect ................................................................35

Index

CP300 Owner’s Manual

141

Appendix

Tempo ........................................................................... 38

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] buttons ...................................... 38

Time Signature .............................................................. 87

Touch ...................................................................... 61, 68

TRACK [1][2][3-16] buttons .................................... 42, 50

Transpose ..................................................................... 37

[TRANSPOSE] button ................................................... 37

Troubleshooting ............................................................ 98

Tune .............................................................................. 68

[USB] connector ........................................................... 92

VARIATION [▼][▲] buttons .......................................... 25

Voice ............................................................................. 25

Voice Edit ...................................................................... 56

[VOICE EDIT] button ..................................................... 56

Voice List .................................................................... 103

[VOICE/PERFORMANCE] button ...................... 25, 40, 73

Volume

adjusting each part ................................................ 28

adjusting Master Volume ................................. 13, 23

adjusting Song Volume .................................... 23, 47

XG ............................................................................... 100

XG Drum Kit List ......................................................... 112

XG Voice ....................................................................... 26

XG Voice List .............................................................. 108

Zone Control ........................................................... 28, 39

[ZONE CONTROL] sliders ...................................... 28, 39

LIMITED 3-YEAR WARRANTY ON

DIGITAL PIANOS

(P, CP, YDP, DGX640, DGX650)

Thank you for selecting a YAMAHA product. YAMAHA products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“YAMAHA”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and

every YAMAHA product. YAMAHA sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer

you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from

YAMAHA’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area) and (2) used exclusively in the

Warranted Area. YAMAHA suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized YAMAHA

dealer or YAMAHA Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: YAMAHA will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed YAMAHA specifications for new parts. If

YAMAHA elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, YAMAHA will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover

(a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure

to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than YAMAHA or an authorized YAMAHA Service Center; (b) any unit which has

been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI

(Interference/noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any

evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only

the Original Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area.

Contact your local authorized YAMAHA dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

YAMAHA at the address, telephone number or website shown below. YAMAHA may request that you send the defective product to a

local authorized YAMAHA Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to YAMAHA for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether

a dealer has been authorized by YAMAHA, please contact YAMAHA’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check

Yamaha’s website at www.usa.yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by

a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other

dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for

warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if

requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD

OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR

DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE

OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES THEREOF. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE

PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you

specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to

the Product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized YAMAHA Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.usa.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

02/15/13

DPWARPAD

C.S.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

404MWCP*.*-01C0

Printed in Japan

WG78300

Yamaha Web Site (English only)

http:// ww w.yamahasynth.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/